JP6864796B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to a player based on a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. Are known. In this type of gaming machine, there are those provided with a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other display (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-240381

In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means as described above, the player pays attention to the display contents of each display means and proceeds with the game. However, a configuration having a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the mode of display by the plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest of this type of gaming machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to give a feature to a mode of display by a plurality of display means and to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means. It is to plan.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.
That is, the gaming machine of the present invention
It is a gaming machine that enables a special game that is advantageous to the player to be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
A game board with a game area formed on the front,
A front frame having a viewing window that covers the front surface of the game board and makes the game area visible from the front.
A first display device provided on the back side of the game board and capable of viewing the display screen through the viewing window .
A second display device provided on the left side of the front frame and capable of viewing the display screen from the front ,
A third display device provided on the right side of the front frame and capable of viewing the display screen from the front,
A variation display starting means capable of starting variation display of identification information by the first display device based on the establishment of a predetermined variation start condition, and
It is provided with an effect display execution means capable of executing an effect display related to the variable display of the identification information.
The second display device and the third display device are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction of the first display device in a state where the display screen is tilted toward the viewing window.
The effect display executing means may execute the effect display on the first display device , or may execute the effect display on the first display device, the second display device, and the third display device .
The first display device, as effect is produced when run the effect display in the second display device and the third display device, initially the second display device and the subsequently performed in the first display device It has a specific effect mode that is also executed by the third display device.
The presentation in the display based on the specific representation embodiment, the second display device and the third display effect display said first display device in which a predetermined background on each of the display screen is associated with the variable display in a state of being displayed the device After being started on the display screen of, the effect display related to the variation display is started on each display screen of the second display device and the third display device, and the display area of the background on each display screen is started. Is gradually reduced, and the display area of the effect display related to the variable display on each display screen is gradually expanded accordingly.

According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined change start condition is satisfied, variable display of the identification information is started at the first display device, effect display associated with variable display of the identification information, executed by the first display device In some cases, it is executed in the first display device, the second display device, and the third display device. Thus, in response to start of variable display of the identification information in the first display device, it is possible to interest the player to effect display by the first display unit and second display unit and third display unit. Further, as a mode in which the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display device, the second display device, and the third display device , the first display device is used first, and then the second display device and the third display device are used. has a specific effect mode of the display device even run, the effect display based on the specific representation embodiment, related to changes displayed with the predetermined background to the display screen of the second display unit and third display unit are displayed After the effect display is started on the display screen of the first display device , the effect display related to the variable display is started on each display screen of the second display device and the third display device, and the background on each display screen is started. The display area of is gradually reduced, and along with this, the display area of the effect display related to the variable display on each display screen is gradually expanded. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

The "effect display related to the variable display" is, for example, an effect display that changes the background when the variable display of the identification information is performed, or an effect that indicates whether or not the result of the variable display is a specific display result. It refers to various effect displays related to the variation display of identification information, such as a display and an effect display that suggests a high or low possibility that the result of the variation display will be a specific display result.

According to the above invention, it is possible to give a feature to the mode of display by a plurality of display means and to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting and entering a ball. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 confirmation process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a table which shows the symbol type of the production symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of a state A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of a state B. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect mode C, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect mode D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production pattern game production of the production mode C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production pattern game production of the production mode D. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small hit fluctuation in the effect mode D, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small hit game in the effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit look-ahead effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of production when a specific period is started. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen from before the start to after the start of the mode selection period in a big hit game. (A) is a table showing the type of the second effect pattern (battle effect pattern of the effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing the type of the third effect pattern (battle effect pattern of the effect mode D). It is a figure which shows the display example of the notice image in effect mode D. This is a display pattern determination table for the preview image. Directional pattern It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a game production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 1st specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 1st specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect A. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect B. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect C. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 1st notice production (the production hold notice), and (b) is the production hold notice decision table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 3rd notice production (fireworks notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 4th notice production (chance zone notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 5th notice effect (full rotation notice) and the full rotation effect.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is detachably configured from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and to be inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. This is a configuration to prevent the game machine 1 from colliding with the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) and being damaged. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-probability low-base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port (second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high-base state, and whether or not the special symbol is correct or not. The judgment probability (first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is set (more than twice) (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, rather than firing the game ball into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entering the ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol is variablely displayed, but the left game area 3A (second game area). It is considered to be advantageous for the player to play a game in which a game ball is fired into (1 game area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first hit / fail determination executing means".

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (doublet) such as "777" (also called "big hit symbol"). Say). In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. It should be noted that, when a small hit occurs, the symbol dedicated to the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is observed and grasped. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc., a mode of performing the effect display using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and a mode of the first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition to this, it has an aspect in which one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used for effect display. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, displays the first special figure hold. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as “second hit / fail judgment”), the normal symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / miss determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as "second winning / failing determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (big hit execution). It is also called a possible state or a jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts, and the predetermined jackpot (a predetermined jackpot) The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by coming into contact with the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. Further, since the third start port 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter the ball, when the left-handed game becomes a big hit (so-called first hit) and the first big hit game is executed in the right-handed game. , The game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second). 2 Special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, like the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is passed through the inclined upper surface passage in an arbitrary direction (the second major winning opening 35 described later). Induce to.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second start opening 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, in the second large winning device 36 (second variable entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37 allows the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) general entry ports 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. The method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called left-handed, and the method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called right-handed. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / miss determination).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment), the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy). The low base state) is a game in which the ball is aimed at entering the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, or the second big winning opening 35 by hitting right. That is, in the jackpot game and the low-accuracy high-base state (state B) or the high-accuracy low-base state (state C), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by right-handed (second special symbol hit / fail judgment). It will be a right-handed game. Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the state should be left-handed or should be left-handed. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then the stop is displayed, and the first start port 20 or the second start port is displayed according to the special symbol (stop symbol) in which the stop display (deriving display) is performed. The result of the winning / failing judgment (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, in the case of the second big hit (4R second big hit), the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of variable display) of special symbols and effect symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as the "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit is "small". It is also called "hit mode". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct (“acquired information”” is obtained based on the entry of the game ball. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, each special During the execution of the variation display of the symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol winning / failing judgments, the right of the special symbol winning / failing judgment for the incoming ball is reserved (reserved) up to a predetermined number (4 each). ) Can be done.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of pending numbers is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage of the game ball, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as a "game control unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls an effect to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the like. The general entry sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general entry port sensor 27a is provided in each general entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let control be performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. And a display mode in which variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. The display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines and determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "2R first jackpot". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", "2R 7th big hits", and "2R 8th big hits". In the "15R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" have the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the jackpot (1st jackpot 30). Twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

Further, for "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot", the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be described later. Move to the high probability state of (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R 2nd big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" shift the game state after the end of the big hit game to the low probability state described later (the probability change function is not activated). .. Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next big hit occurs. The game playability in the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right-handed game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period during which it is possible to determine whether the symbol is correct or not, generate a small hit, and increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between the big hits). In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 2nd jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 50 times. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "2R 5th jackpot", the "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next jackpot occurs, and the "high base generation function" either causes the next jackpot or changes in the special symbol. It ends based on the display being executed 50 times. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R 5th big hit", after the big hit game is finished, until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, it is in a high accuracy high base state, and even after 50 times, no big hit occurs. , The game state is set to the high accuracy and low base state.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is an advantageous period for players who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short period of time by making small hits occur frequently by right-handed games. is there. It is assumed that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state. Therefore, if the big hit does not occur until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed 50 times after the end of the big hit game, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state).

In addition, the "2R 6th jackpot" is in a high-accuracy high-base state until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times after the jackpot game is completed, and if the jackpot does not occur even after 100 times, It is the same as "2R 5th jackpot" except that the gaming state is set to the high accuracy and low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" is set earlier than the "2R 6th jackpot" when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Therefore, it can be said that the "2R 5th jackpot" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the "2R 6th jackpot".

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th jackpot", the player will not be notified because the game state will be in the low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Regardless of the state of the game, the player will play with the expectation that the state will shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the interest in the game will be enhanced.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 8th big hit game) related to "2R 8th big hit". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has passed, and "2R". In the case of "8th jackpot", the player will not be notified because the game state will be in the low probability low base state (normal state which is disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the variation display of the special symbol has passed. Regardless of the state of the game, the game is expected to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the game is enhanced.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". High-accuracy base state, high-accuracy high-base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot", and jackpot game related to "2R 8th jackpot" (2R 8th jackpot game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is. Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the gaming state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In addition, when the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. For this reason, the player plays with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state when the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, regardless of the gaming state in the non-notification state. , Will enhance the entertainment of the game.

In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected to continue at least the high-base state (that is, the non-notification state continues) without shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state. I do. If the non-notification state continues after 50 times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it shifts to the high accuracy and low base state. You will play with the expectation that you will do it, and you will enhance the interest of the game. In this way, in the non-notification state, points that raise the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain a high game interest for a long period of time.

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, and one time (and) compared to other big hits. The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R 3rd big hit game, the 4R 4th big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, by generating small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the game state at the time of small hits is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game is completed, and when a small hit occurs. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

The distribution probability to each jackpot in the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first jackpot and 35% for the 4R second jackpot. On the other hand, the jackpots in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 15R third jackpot 50%, 4R fourth jackpot 5%, 2R fifth jackpot 5%, and 2R sixth jackpot. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 whose fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the winning / failing determination (first special symbol winning / failing determination) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the ball enters is more likely to be advantageous to the player (a large number of game balls can be acquired). There is. Further, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a "variation pattern". There are random numbers (also called "fluctuation pattern information"). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct as shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port is activated or not activated. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a big hit is large. A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and inserts the game ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol is used. The symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for the big hit, 2 minutes for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced by the left-handed game, aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

When the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second is 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can perform the right-handed game without reducing the number of balls held as compared with the left-handed game (in state B, it is maintained or slightly reduced, and state C. It becomes possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second special symbol variable game) while increasing the number in Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) in the game state, and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the operation period. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, as compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the speed of the game torrent in the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is opened (the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and is second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol. There is a possibility of trying to display the second special symbol in a variable manner without displaying it in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Since it is set to, even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variablely displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner in the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner in the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in the high base state such as the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state, and in the high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time saving function, and the right-handed game. Improves game efficiency. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), but the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed in a short time, a right-handed game in which the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol winning / failing determination, can be performed is performed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the right-handed game causes the ball to enter the second starting port 21 frequently, so that the number of balls held is not significantly reduced. 2 Aim for the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is correct or not. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is frequently generated by a second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game, and the ball held in the small hit game. Along with increasing the number, we aim to generate the next big hit by judging whether the second special symbol is correct or not. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B (90%) when each of these winning openings is closed. The above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows down the second second. The structure is such that the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 flows down and flows down to the out opening 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball is entered into the winning opening, discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that is not available.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 80 to 90%) are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, a 30/63 probability of a small hit, and a 32/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 80 to 90%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 and other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the third starting port 21 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Enter the ball at 26 or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly entered into the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is placed even in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball is frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first and does not enter the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only the game ball enters the second large winning opening 30.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and the game will be less enjoyable. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and smoothly proceed with the big hit game. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 when not during the big hit game. Absent.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second start port 21 enter the second start port 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even if a small hit is made and the small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the second large winning opening 21 on the upstream side causes the second large winning on the downstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the second major winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 When the second big winning opening 35 is reached, if the second big winning opening 35 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35.

Next, the high-accuracy low-base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is about half that of the high base state (high base state). Since it is set to 120/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. It becomes. Since the probability of winning is about 1/2, hits and misses occur in about half and half.

That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21. The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to 0.9 seconds three times (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), the second starting port 21 will open as long as the right-handed game is continued. It closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, it opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. In the example where hits and misses occur alternately, the second start port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and then the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, becomes out, and closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and repeats the cycle (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about. 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy and low-base state, the period in which the second starting port 21 is opened is about 30%, and the period in which the second starting port 21 is closed is about 70%. .. Therefore, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the second start is compared with the high-base state in which the period in which the second start port 21 is in the open state is about 90% and the period in which the second start port 21 is in the closed state is about 10%. It is set that there is a high possibility that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the mouth 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reaches the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 without entering the second starting port 21. .. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies depending on whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed in the right-handed game has a small hit. ing.

As described above, in the high accuracy and low base state, about 70% of the game balls that flow down the right game area (flow down to the second start port 21) enter the second start port 21. Instead, it flows down to the second big winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, the first 2 The ball enters the starting port 21, and if the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning opening 35, and a small hit game. The ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the open state.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state continues until at least the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol hit / fail judgment (only the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued). The longer the game continues, the more the player can increase the number of balls he has. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 times). Further, as a result, as the total winning balls in the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first step is made. 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to almost maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the speed of the holding ball decrease is suppressed). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state), and has diversified playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the display is finished, the game state is changed to the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high base state, it is difficult for the effect symbol display unit or the like to recognize whether the high base state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. The game effect is executed in various display modes. As a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, it will change to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period of time.

Further, in this embodiment, there are "2R 5th jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot" as the types of jackpots that shift from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. "2R 5th jackpot" shifts from the high accuracy high base state to the high accuracy low base state after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and "2R 6th jackpot" shifts to 100 times special symbol variation display. After that, the state shifts from the high accuracy high base state to the high accuracy low base state. In addition, it has "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot" as high accuracy and low base states. The "2R 7th jackpot" shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state) after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and the "2R 8th jackpot" is 100 times special. After the fluctuation display of the symbol has passed, the state shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, the high hit game and the high after the big hit game are related to the four big hit types of "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit". By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. That is, it is in a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified.

In this embodiment, 50 times according to the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" which are in the non-notification state. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after the passage of time, it is more likely that the high base state will shift to the high accuracy low base state after 100 times than when the high base state ends after 50 times. It is supposed to be done. As a result, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after 50 times, and the high-base state continues without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state even after 50 times (). Even if the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high accuracy and low base state. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period of time.

In addition, even if the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy and low-base state is set to be the same regardless of whether the transition is made after 50 times or 100 times, by changing to such a mode. On the contrary, the case of shifting after 50 times may be more likely to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state than the case of shifting after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the high accuracy and low base state is lowered. Further, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has passed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number, has elapsed ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy, low-base state (if you don't get a big hit by then). On the contrary, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are displayed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times, has elapsed (if it is a big hit by then). If not), it may be confirmed that the state does not shift to the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is satisfied in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying characters and characters that make it easy for the player to recognize the game state (performing a definite effect). The status may be notified.

In addition, in the case where the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit or the result is a miss in the high accuracy / low base state, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is obtained in the above-mentioned high base state. It is the same as the case of a big hit and the case of a miss.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second start port 21 or the like, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the second gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide it upstream from the starting port 21 and the second large winning opening 35.

Further, when the right-handed game should be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game should be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined mode to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations) provided in the RAM of 1) has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311), and it is related to Special Figure 2. Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-in / entering ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether it is out of order (preliminary judgment), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of big hit is further determined (preliminary judgment). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ").

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of the judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what type of big hit is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is judged in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command, and this is generated. Can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Ordinary symbol winning / failing judgment processing]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail judgment based on the values "0" to "238"), it is judged whether or not the hit is true (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is lost. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or off normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has passed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1008). S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and when "Special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), Perform special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106), and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process is in progress to set the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, one or more random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 are stored (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest region of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the deviations (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined that the hit / fail of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, either the 4R first big hit or the 4R second big hit is executed. If the hit / fail judgment of the 2nd special symbol (Special Figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, the 15R 3rd big hit, 4R 4th big hit, 2R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, 2R 7th big hit, 2R One of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the above is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of the fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out-of-order table (state A and the out-of-hold and hold number in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot fluctuation table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in the state B and the state C, since the game is performed mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first The variable display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simplified (there are few types and the fluctuation time is short). In the state B, if it is a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P15, and if it is out of the way, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P16. Further, in the state C, in the case of a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P23, and in the case of a deviation, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P24.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and if it is a high-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the variable display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn on the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time in Special Figure 1 (S2904), and finish the process. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A flag having a special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol (S2003), and shift to the processing of S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening the winning opening to closing) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2006), and finish the process. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. 21 to 29 (S211) Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is more likely to be a jackpot with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit fluctuation flag is ON, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the states B and C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the states B and C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) than the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern for a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state A, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types and the time is short).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player launches the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the jackpot standby state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the jackpot winning device (first jackpot winning device 31) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is closed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). When it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has been completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the start gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots. Determines whether or not falls under any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is determined whether the completed jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (S2203). .. If it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. If it is determined in S2209 that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, either the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. As it is, finish the process. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot? Is determined (S2206). When it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, resulting in a low accuracy high base state. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state is changed. Set "50" in the B counter (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a low accuracy high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between the multiple opening operations has elapsed (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed regardless of the passage of the start gate. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when S2303 determines that it is time to open the large winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second large winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large winning prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the game's interest. At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, and are not switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. If it is determined that it is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (also referred to as the first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information"). Is stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol (also referred to as "specific display mode"), a high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and a high-probability state (also referred to as a predetermined display mode) is satisfied. Benefits) will end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power failure monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and a power failure signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from speakers, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91 is determined. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the process shifts to the process of S4403, and the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed to shift to the process of S4403. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start entry command (special figure 1 start entry command or special figure 2 start entry command) received by S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) is set according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Stop display is displayed to end the variable effect (effect pattern game effect). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big winning opening command sent based on the entry into 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set a round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is an ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening entry command), the big winning opening (1st big winning) specified based on the command A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of variable pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variable pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, and the effect modes C and D are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy and low base state. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the effect mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). In the case where the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols constituting the jackpot mode (same effect symbol). ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, the game effect is executed using the predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

In principle, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1"-> "2"-> "3" ...-> "7"-> "8"-> "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in this embodiment, when the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode in which the middle symbol → right symbol (also referred to as “first stop mode”) and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) stop mode (also referred to as "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" in the effect mode E (state B). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C, In the case of D (state C), the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped.

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the condition (1) in the production modes A and B (state A) that the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure works (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and based on this, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "small hit". In the case of (3) in the effect modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing". And (4) In the effect mode D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "small hit", the variation display of the variation display It is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stop.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in the effect mode D (state C). Based on this, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation, this is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variation display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variation display mode based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different and diversified according to the situation of the game. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5" and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter "blue"). It is also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, and the number symbol when there is an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variation display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls that the player can obtain (the number of prize balls won) is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific disparity) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the big hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the disengagement mode (complete disparity, reach disparity). Of the (eyes), the reach-separated number is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the out-of-order modes (completely disjointed eyes, reach disjointed eyes), the completely disjointed eye is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Yes, since it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (change display of the second special symbol) is performed during the change display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such a situation. When this is done, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variation display (and stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed. There is. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high accuracy low base state) are game states in which the right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special) is mainly performed. (Variation display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display). However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in the state C, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accuracy low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol pass / fail determination. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect of the state A is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed according to the predetermined mode control conditions under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). .. Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the effect mode in the state A.

Further, in the state A, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "3", "5" consisting of green symbols, The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of the red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)), the variation display is basically the second stop mode. It is stopped at (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see Fig. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), and the shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (directed symbol 8L) and the right symbol (directed symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, the reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (directed symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. Until it is stopped, the reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the jackpot mode is displayed) is mainly developed. The same applies to the states B and C with respect to the establishment of reach and the effect of reach.

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in different stitches (completely loose stitches or reach loose stitches) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 However, it is switched to the big hit game production for 4R big hit related to the first special symbol. When the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state), and the game is related to the "4R second big hit". In the case of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is the state B (low accuracy and high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production of state B]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) will be described. The high-accuracy high-base state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the "2R fifth jackpot" or the "2R sixth jackpot" in the state C (high-accuracy low-base state).

The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol pass / fail determination. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically set according to the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the effect mode E.

Further, in the state B, as the effect symbols 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols, the symbols "1", "9" consisting of green symbols, and red The symbols "3", "5", and "7" composed of the symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed. In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped at (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). This is because in the state B, the second special symbol time saving function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the deviation variation without reach and the small hit variation can be digested in the shortest possible time so that the game can proceed smoothly. Because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so that the player's expectation can be expected. Don't be afraid of people. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation (that is, "reach fluctuation"), or when the reach fluctuation is disguised as a normal fluctuation, the "reach out-of-reach fluctuation" (a type of fluctuation mode without reach) occurs. If so, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIGS. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f) See).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged mode (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the jackpot game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the doublet jackpot mode in the state B is related to "15R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot", the jackpot game effect is the 15Rth. A big hit game effect for 3 big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach loose) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. It will change. Then, when the started big hit game is related to "2R 5th big hit" or "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high accuracy high base state (state B). When the big hit game is related to "2R 7th big hit" or "2R 8th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low accuracy high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, in the state B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. To. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (off mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When a small hit is made in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains as the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol). 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed manner), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to the deviation. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game remains in the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

In addition, in the low accuracy high base state which is the state B, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. , The game state shifts to the state A (low accuracy low base state) at the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (disengagement fluctuations), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". To do. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit in the high accuracy and high base state which is the state B, At the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (disengagement fluctuations), the game state shifts to state C (high accuracy and low base state), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". ..

[Game production in state C]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high accuracy and low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state C is mainly the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment, and the small hit occurrence. It is a production (small hit game production) that accompanies. The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained by the small hits between the big hits by causing the small hits to occur frequently until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, in the state C, it is decided to perform a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked. Details on this point will be described later.

Further, as described above, in the state C, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect of the state C is performed under the condition that the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) as in the above-mentioned states A and B, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. The player can operate the first effect button 63a to select the effect mode, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. Further, in the state C, as in the state B, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" composed of the blue symbols and the symbols "1", "9" composed of the green symbols are used. , And the symbols "3", "5", and "7" consisting of the red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C.

Here, the content (effect specification) of the game effect developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is significantly different between the "effect mode C" and the "effect mode D" in the state C. .. Therefore, in the following, the game effect in each effect mode will be described separately for "effect mode C" and "effect mode D".

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8, as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A given character is displayed. The characters displayed here include a friendly character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed facing each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of the symbol is not performed. There are multiple types of characters for each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one ally character (also referred to as "ally character") and one enemy character (also referred to as "enemy character") are in the production mode C. It is displayed at the time of setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the ally character attacks the enemy character or the ally character is attacked by the enemy character. When such an effect by a character (character effect) is performed as a variable effect based on a variable effect pattern (when it is performed in association with a variable display of identification information), the result of the variable display becomes a small hit and a small hit game is performed. There are cases where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (when it is performed in association with a special game after the end of the variable display).

In addition, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (earned profit amount) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a 5-digit number of "00000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt". The prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls acquired) acquired by the player in the big hit game, the small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state. When it becomes C, the number of prize balls won during that period (so-called number of prize balls won during the consecutive villa period) is shown until the game state returns to state A (excluding during the big hit game). .. Further, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game increases), the prize ball acquisition (increase in the number of balls held) in the small hit game is obtained. The prize ball count image C1 is displayed for directing. That is, as the small hit game effect, the effect display (ball entry effect) is performed by the prize ball count image C1. Details of the effect associated with the occurrence of small hits will be described later.

The basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C of such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as the effect hold (holding symbol), the right-handed instruction image M, and the background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the out-of-reach variation without reach can be digested in as short a time as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. .. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (fanning effect) for increasing the expectation of the player is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 (Fig. 57). c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "small hit", the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol →). It is stopped at (right symbol) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged mode (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the jackpot game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the doublet jackpot mode in the state C is related to "15R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot", in this case, it is for 15R 3rd jackpot. The big hit game production or the big hit game production for the 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach loose) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. It will change. In this case, as the big hit game effect, the end of the state C, that is, the effect display of the content indicating the end of the advantageous state in which the small hit occurs frequently is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the started big hit game is related to "2R 5th big hit" or "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high accuracy high base state (state B). When the big hit game is related to "2R 7th big hit" or "2R 8th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low accuracy high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit in the effect mode C (state C) and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner based on this, the variable display is performed in the normal variation and the first It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific random pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and of the three symbols, two adjacent symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355””. , "557", etc.) is set as a specific variation (small hit mode). The symbol combination that constitutes a specific random pattern (small hit mode) does not establish reach, but it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols are the same symbol (number), so such a symbol combination is used. Is also called "reach arrangement".

Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that constitute a specific pattern (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute a specific pattern in state A. It is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be done, but in the state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific disparity (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol types change depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pattern type (color type in this example) of the effect pattern and to attract the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) which are considered to be green symbols in the state A, and a specific disparity (first) in the state C. The red symbol that can form the display mode) is used. For example, a part of the effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are the blue symbols in the state A is used as the red symbol. Or, in state A, there are blue symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") and green symbols ("1", "3", "5"). , "9"), respectively (for example, "4" and "5") can be made into a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist in the state A, may be provided, and a specific variation (first display mode) may be formed by the symbols belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the symbol types that can form a specific pattern more prominent and to easily attract the attention of the player. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5", which are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A, are designated as red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, , The symbol of "7", which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning in the state A, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5", which are red symbols (second symbol type), are used as symbols that can form a specific doublet, and the symbols "7", which are gold symbols (third symbol type), are used. Can be a 15R jackpot mode (doublet of "7") corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that can form a specific doublet (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (15R jackpot mode) are clearly distinguished and hit. It is possible to show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol →) that cannot appear in other effect modes. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol). For this reason, the player is attracted not only to the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also to the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode. Further, in the effect mode C, when the small hit mode is derived and displayed (the variation display is stopped), the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) is performed. Specifically, a single line image extending laterally (horizontally) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the periphery of each symbol. The effect image E (effect image), which is composed of the image (decorative image) that decorates the image, is displayed. As a result, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display according to the first stop mode is stopped, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in a small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the winning prize ball shown by the prize ball count image C1 is obtained for each entry. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore, the winning prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of 10. Further, when the small hit game is executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a are accompanied by the execution of the small hit game. The effect display (character effect) by the second character) is to be performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as "first effect") in which one of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, the ally character) attacks or sets the other (for example, the enemy character) is performed. It is supposed to be. The character effect (also referred to as "character effect display") in this case does not include the battle effect described later, which depicts the confrontation scene of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the large winning opening for small hits (second large winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hit game with a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the character effect and the character effect performed as the variable effect described later as a related effect, and from the variable display. Through the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a unified effect (character effect) by the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 accompanying the small hit is a sub of the second big prize opening command sent from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. It is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is based on the reception of the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90. Since they are performed, all of these effects correspond to small hit game effects (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as "first profit effect".

In this way, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbols) occur frequently, and the small hit game is accompanied by this. Since the addition display and character effect display of the prize ball count image C1 can be executed with high frequency, the small hits are strongly generated by the player by coordinating the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls held) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the game interest in the production mode C (state C). It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the character production is not performed unless the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the relevant entry when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 is performed. It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

Next, the content (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach fanning off variation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the effect mode C, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8 etc.) ) Is performed (see FIG. 56 (a)). In addition, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and when the reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under such circumstances, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the variation effect pattern of the reach variation or the reach deviation variation, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) is stopped first according to the second stop mode. However (see Fig. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, a production display depicting a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the opponent. (First production) is performed. In this case, the first effect is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. This first production can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a friendly character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first production pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an enemy character ("" There are two patterns (also referred to as "first effect pattern B"), and for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the content (type) of the attack to be launched and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the content of the effect when the first effect is performed suggests information (big hit reliability, content of the effect that can be executed later, etc.) regarding the current variation display (the variation). (Notice) is to be given. The first production is a production in which one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other and ends, and does not include the battle production described later.

For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as the "first effect pattern") is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which a ally character attacks), at least the 2R jackpot mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display. That is, it is suggested that the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently, does not occur. In this case, in the fluctuation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in complete doublet (off mode). Ruka (reach fanning off fluctuation), or whether the reach is established and the reach effect is developed, but finally the middle symbol stops at a symbol different from the left and right symbols, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (out of reach). (Variation out of reach) or, after the reach effect, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) (big hit variation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the opposite first effect pattern B (a pattern in which the enemy character launches an attack), the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the fluctuation display. Suggest that there is a possibility. In this case, in the fluctuation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in complete doublet (off mode). Ruka (reach fanning off fluctuation), although the reach was established and developed into reach production, the middle symbol finally stopped at a symbol different from the left and right symbols, and the production symbol 8 was doublet (out of reach or 2R jackpot mode). Is it displayed (variation out of reach or variation in 2R jackpot), or the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) after the reach effect (variation in jackpot). In this way, by the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach is established, whether or not it is advantageous for the player, etc.) is determined. It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in the above-mentioned S4505. It is decided whether to do it.

In this way, after the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped (after the execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol (number) that stops when the right symbol is different from the left symbol, the reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 changes. It is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). In this case, the fluctuation is a fluctuation that is out of reach (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol has the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second production is a production by characters (friendly characters, enemy characters) that is performed after the reach is established (after the execution of the first production) and the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is still fluctuating. (Character production), and in this embodiment, it is performed as a battle production that depicts a confrontation scene between a friendly character and an enemy character that had been displayed as a background until then. This second production (battle production) can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a ally character wins a confrontation (battle) (also called "second production pattern A") and a pattern in which a ally character loses a confrontation (battle). There are three patterns (also called "second production pattern B") and a pattern that ends the confrontation (battle) without deciding the victory or defeat (also called "second production pattern C"), and for each pattern, the enemy There are multiple patterns that determine the type of character, which of the friendly character and the enemy character attacks first (the type of character that attacks first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and so on. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is assumed that information (big hit reliability, etc.) regarding the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) is suggested according to the content of the production when the second production (battle production) is performed. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), among the second production patterns (also referred to as "second production patterns"), the ally character makes a first strike on the second production pattern A (friend victory pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character wins as it is, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character finally wins. Further, in the second production pattern B (friendly defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character is defeated. Furthermore, in the second production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern), there is a pattern in which the ally character makes a first strike but the enemy character dodges the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes the first strike and the ally character endures the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with the first strike of the ally character or the enemy character, and the production content (confrontation) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes, etc.) are predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the second effect (battle) is any of a plurality of types of patterns depending on the variable effect pattern set (selected) in the above-mentioned S4505. It is decided whether to execute the production).

In this embodiment, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot), that is, variation. When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the display, the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed before the display of the jackpot mode (before the derivation display). (Direction) is performed. In this case, a 15R or 4R jackpot game is performed after the variation display is stopped (after the jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes state C (high accuracy and low base state) again after the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur again after the big hit game. In this way, since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game, the second production pattern A is a pattern in which the ally character wins.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as an out-of-reach variation (reach out-of-reach variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being out of order, that is, the effect symbol 8 is disassembled as a result of the variation display. When it is displayed by the eyes (out-of-order mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern) is performed before the display of the out-of-order mode (before the derivation display). In this case, after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the game in the state C is continued. Since the game in the state C continues in this way, the second production pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without deciding the victory or defeat.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R 5th to 8th jackpots), that is, the variation. When the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a result of the display in the reach loose pattern (2R jackpot mode), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is before the display of the 2R jackpot mode (before the derivation display). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R jackpot game is performed after the variation display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes the state B (high base state) after the jackpot game. Therefore, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is completed with the occurrence of the 2R big hit as an opportunity. Since the game state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot in this way, the second production pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated.

Here, among the second production patterns A to C, the patterns including the content that the ally character makes the first strike are the second production pattern A (friend victory pattern) and the second production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle production (second production) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production is the preemption of the ally character. If it starts with an attack, it can be inferred that at least there is no possibility of a 2R jackpot, that is, the end of state C. On the other hand, since all of the second production patterns A to C correspond to the pattern including the content that the enemy character makes the first strike (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach on the display screen 7a. If the battle production (second production) is started after the establishment and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production starts from the first strike of the enemy character, there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot at that point (the end of state C is possible). Gender) cannot be excluded. Then, after the enemy character's first strike, if the ally character is defeated and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern B, so the fluctuation is a 2R jackpot. As a result, the game in the state C ends. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins and the battle effect ends after the enemy character's first strike, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation of 15R or 4R, and when the ally character dodges the first strike of the enemy character and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and in any of these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. In this way, in the reach fluctuation in the production mode C, by performing the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits occur frequently continues (victory, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a directing effect that arouses the expectations and anxieties of the player. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the variable production (character production) from the first production to the second production (battle production), and it is possible to enhance the game interest of the production mode C (state C). It becomes.

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56B, in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is smaller (reduced size) than other effect modes such as the effect mode C in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (also referred to as "reduced display"), and the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D that adopts such a screen configuration, the effect display that mainly shows the fighter flying is developed on the display screen 7a while the effect symbol 8 is usually displayed in a variable manner at the upper right of the screen. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach is changed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and after the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is displayed on the entire display screen. It is said to be feasible using. In this embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main production image in the production mode D, but an image with a motif other than this may be displayed as the main production image. It is possible. Further, also in the effect mode D, the right-handed instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed as in the effect mode C.

The basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D of such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Also in FIG. 58, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as production hold (holding symbol) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is usually displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the variable display of the symbol is not performed. When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variation display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal variation (off or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The stop in the third stop mode is for the same purpose as the effect mode C described above. In the effect mode D, the mode of the variation display when the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. .. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is hidden and the effect symbol 8 which has been displayed small (reduced display) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. It is displayed large in the substantially center of the screen 7a, and the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). After that, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → middle symbol). (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), after the main image X is hidden, the effect symbol 8 is displayed large in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. At the same timing, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped at substantially the same time, and the middle symbol may be displayed in a variable manner (scroll display).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged mode (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the 4R or 15R jackpot game can be executed, and if it is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach-bare), the 2R jackpot game can be executed. It becomes. Since the effects during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, detailed description here will be omitted.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit in the effect mode D (state C) and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner (small hit variation) based on this, the variable display is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. It is performed in the normal fluctuation and stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58 (b)). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific random pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the variation display due to the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in the other effect modes, or the effect image E (effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. , The display of the effect symbol 8 was mainly used to emphasize the occurrence of small hits. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, by displaying the effect symbol 8 in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific variation (small hit mode), the notification of the occurrence of the small hit due to the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 is not so much. Although it is supposed to be performed in an inconspicuous manner, at that time, it is possible to display an effect image different from the effect symbol 8, and the display of the effect image may suggest (notice) the occurrence of a small hit to the player. It is supposed to be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y in the substantially center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit fluctuation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second large winning opening 35 in one small hit game, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 2 per one small hit game. Since the design (gauge configuration) is such that three or three game balls can enter the second large winning opening 35, three target images Y are displayed in response to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect pattern game effect), and the variation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y in the above-mentioned S4505 (small for the effect mode D). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this way, the player can infer that the result of the variation display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can be said to be a notice effect image that announces the occurrence of a small hit. It is also possible to include the display of the target image Y in the advance notice effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4506 without including it in the variation effect pattern.

Then, when the small hit variation (variation display of the effect symbol 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (“355”, etc.) is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize is opened in the small hit game. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as “destruction effect”) showing how the target image Y is destroyed is performed for each ball (see FIG. 59 (b)). The destruction effect is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. It corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In this embodiment, the destruction effect represents a state in which the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from a fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is also performed.

The effect from the start of the small hit fluctuation to the small hit game is a basic effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. In addition to this, in the effect mode D, the effect related to the small hit is described above. The effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, the so-called "hold look-ahead effect" is performed. The hold look-ahead effect (also referred to as “small hit look-ahead effect”) related to this small hit is realized by the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, when the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) starts the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the variation effect start process (S4402) described above, the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

In the small hit look-ahead effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). The details will be described later, but the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C), and is specific. During the period, a special production will be performed regarding small hits. If it is determined by S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this process ends without performing the process after S5002. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not in the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is held as the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol is held). It is determined whether or not a hold (also referred to as "small hit hold") for which the judgment result is a small hit is stored (S5002). This determination is performed with reference to the effect hold information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in the above-mentioned S4402, that is, the stored content of the effect hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. , It is determined whether or not there is a small hit hold, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the change display (also referred to as “the change”) of the effect symbol 8 to be started from now on (S5002). The small hit hold is also referred to as "specific acquisition information".

If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), this process is completed without performing the processing after S5003, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined to be (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not small hits occur three or more times in a row as a result of the variation display including the variation (variation display starting from now on) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holds are continuously stored, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation (S5003). This determination can also be performed with reference to the effect hold information (stored contents of the effect hold information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holds are not stored in succession (NO in S5003), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S5004. In this case, the small hit look-ahead effect (small hit continuous notice) based on the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the variation is a small hit variation corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, a variation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the variation effect pattern related to the variation. With the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect accompanied by displaying a plurality of (three in this example) target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). That is, three target images Y may be displayed as an effect (notice of the change) suggesting the occurrence of a small hit in the change.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holds are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period in which a special effect is performed as an effect related to a small hit. In this embodiment, it is determined that the small hit game is performed three or more times in succession, that is, the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more consecutive fluctuation displays. If so (YES in S5003), a specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines whether or not to start the specific period by performing a start lottery for the specific period (a kind of random number lottery for determining the effect), and the start lottery. If you win (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 will be performed to start the specific period. Therefore, in this embodiment, when two conditions of (1) three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions for the specific period.

When it is determined that the specific period will start in S5004 (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is set (S5007). .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit holdings determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) is stopped (finished). The specific period flag is a flag indicating that the specific period is in progress, and is mainly at the start of the fluctuation effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the second special figure hold occurrence (special figure 2 start ball entry command reception). ) Is a flag that is referred to when the production hold information is stored (S4402). After the specific period flag is turned on in S5006, it is turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

In this embodiment, when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is set. However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to set the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of an affirmative determination. By doing so, when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, it is possible to provide a case where the small hit look-ahead effect is executed and a case where the small hit look-ahead effect is not executed, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

When a small hit look-ahead effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting a small hit look-ahead effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is sent to the image control board 100. It is transmitted, and thereby, the small hit look-ahead effect is started together with the effect symbol game effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of the variation display (first small hit variation) of the effect symbol 8. , The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is hidden, and the characters "Continuous GET!" Are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

After that, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355”, etc.) due to the stop of the fluctuation display, the specific period display area T (which displays the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the specific period) ( The second display unit) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number of "000" to "999" and a character image of "pt". Then, every time one game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode, the number of prize balls paid out for that one entry ball. The prize ball number image S showing (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is It is additionally displayed on the prize ball count image C2 (number of prize balls won) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). In addition, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second major winning opening 35 but also the third starting opening 26, the prize ball is paid out for each entry (every time one is entered). The prize ball number image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is the prize ball count image. It is additionally displayed in C2 (the number of prize balls won) (see FIG. 61 (d)). As a result, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are easily performed during the specific period, and it is possible to enhance the effect of these ball entry effects. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as "second profit effect".

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the third starting port sensor 26a and the second large winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second prize opening ball entry command) by the sub-control unit 90 (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 may occur other than during the small hit game, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition of the prize ball count image C2 based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. The display can also be executed, for example, as an effect during the variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game. Further, during the specific period, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit) is not performed. This indicates the number of prize balls won during the specific period (during the small hit consecutive villa period) in which the small hit game is performed three or more times in a row, in distinction from the number of prize balls won by the small hit game when it is not in the specific period. Because.

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit hold stored at the start of the specific period (in this embodiment, 3 or 4 small hit hold). ) Corresponds to the small hit variation and the small hit game is completed. Then, when the small hit variation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit hold are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed up to that point is deleted from the screen. At the same time, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of prize balls won indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). The effect display is performed in which the number of prize balls won is added (totaled) to the number of prize balls shown by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in FIG. 61 (see FIGS. 61 (e) → (f)). According to the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A, the display mode of the number of winning prize balls (earned profit amount) is changed to produce the profit effect (first profit effect, second profit effect). It is possible to enhance the effect. The mode of the effect display based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the prize ball number image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. 61. The example is not limited to the example shown in the above, and for example, the specific period display area T is displayed as horizontally long near the upper left part on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as.

On the other hand, if the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 (small hit variation) is started. A plurality of the above-mentioned target images Y (see FIG. 59 (a)) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning opening in the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hit holdings (3 or 4) stored at the time when the fluctuation display is started. It is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in this embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for each small hit game (see FIG. 59 (a)), an effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Displays 9 or 12 target images Y. That is, the number of display of the target image Y (the production mode of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. By displaying the target symbol Y in this way, the result of the fluctuation display that is continuously performed a plurality of times (3 times or 4 times in this example) including the fluctuation display becomes a small hit (specific display result) (small). It is possible to suggest to the player (continuous occurrence of hits). After that, while the small hit game is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of small hit holdings at the start of the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, each time the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35. , The destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y and the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the number of stored small hits is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second large winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed while the effect of updating based on the effect and the small hit fluctuation based on the small hit hold are performed, and the display mode (character movement, etc.) of the character image is changed to the second large winning opening 35. It is possible to set various effects such as an effect that changes based on the entry of the ball. Further, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of a predetermined effect) corresponding to the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, and to select and set one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit look-ahead effect.

In this way, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56 (b)), small hits occur frequently, so that the ball enters the second large winning opening 35. Since the production based on the above (first profit production, second profit production) can be performed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the production related to the small hit and improve the game interest. In particular, when a specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit look-ahead effect in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit hold (“3” or more in this embodiment), the specific period display area T is displayed. Since the prize ball number image S and the prize ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit effect) until all the small hit hold is exhausted and the specific period ends, the prize ball number image S is displayed and the prize ball count image S is displayed. It is possible to secure an execution opportunity of the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty that the display is performed. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of prize balls won (the number of prize balls won during the specific period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is originally displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). It is added (totaled) to the number of prize balls won in the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit hold (“3” or more in this embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hit look-ahead effect. (Small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effects (small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.) executed in association with the small hit, and enhance the game entertainment of the effect mode D (state C). Become.

Next, the content (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach fanning off variation is performed in the effect mode D will be described. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a. (Variation display, etc.) is performed (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 58 (a)). In addition, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and when the reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is hidden after the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8, and the main image X is hidden in the upper right corner of the screen until then. The displayed effect symbol 8 is displayed large in the center of the screen and is displayed in a vertically scrolling manner, and then the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth. It stops in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and later). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), the reach is established, and after that, a predetermined value is set before the variable display result is displayed (derivative display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

Here, the reach effect (also referred to as "third effect") executed in the effect mode D is the same as the second effect executed as the reach effect in the above-mentioned effect mode C, in which the ally character and the enemy character It is a battle production (confrontation production) that depicts a confrontation scene, and has a plurality of third production patterns with different contents of the battle production. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D can be roughly divided into a pattern in which the ally character wins (also referred to as "third effect pattern A") and an ally. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as "third production pattern B") and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without deciding the victory or defeat (also referred to as "third production pattern C"). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of the enemy character, the type of the character that makes the first strike, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (victory pattern for allies) is also referred to as the "first variation effect pattern", and the third effect pattern B (defeat pattern for allies) is also referred to as the "second variation effect pattern". The production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern) is also referred to as a "third variable production pattern". In addition, in the third production (battle production) pattern, the attack content of each of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, the type of weapon used at the time of attack, the type of technique, etc.) has a strong attack power pattern ("" A pattern with a weak attack power (also called a "weak pattern") is provided. In this embodiment, among the patterns in which the ally character attacks the enemy character, the strong pattern (also referred to as the "strong ally pattern") can be won by the ally character compared to the weak pattern (also referred to as the "weak ally pattern"). It is supposed to show that it is highly sexual. Also, among the patterns in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, the strong pattern (also called the "enemy strong pattern") is more likely to win the enemy character than the weak pattern (also called the "enemy weak pattern"). It is supposed to show that. With these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest the development and results of the battle effect to the player.

In addition, when the reach fluctuation or the reach deviation fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D, an image (also referred to as a "preliminary image") that gives notice (suggestion) of the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the change. Is configured to be displayable (see FIG. 65). The display of the preview image is a kind of advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in the above-mentioned S4506 according to the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-mentioned S4505, and is a kind of advance notice provided in advance. When a notice effect (preliminary effect pattern for effect mode D) by displaying the advance notice image is selected (set) based on the effect determination table (not shown), it is determined when executing the variable display (variable effect). The preview image of is displayed. The display start timing of the preview image has various timings such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, and after the reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the mode of the advance notice effect (notice effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image due to the out-of-reach fluctuation is determined from the start of the fluctuation display until it is confirmed that the reach is not established (reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). .. This is because the reach cannot be established by the fluctuation of the reach. In this embodiment, the display start timing of the preview image due to the fluctuation of the reach is set as the start time of the fluctuation display. By displaying the preview image, the player can infer the development of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation. It should be noted that the display of the preview image is not based on the preview effect pattern, but can be included in the variable effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505. Further, the preview image can be said to be "information about the game after the end of the variable display", and the effect of displaying the preview image is also referred to as "information display effect".

In this embodiment, when displaying the preview image, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the lower portion of the display screen 7a is set as the preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65A, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stopped due to the establishment of reach are displayed small on the left and right upper parts of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the reach effect is mainly performed in the center of the screen. It shows the state to be performed (reach state). As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that announces (suggests) the occurrence (execution) of a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot). 501 (first information), second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and foretelling (suggesting) the transition to the effect mode E (state B). It has three types of preview images with the third preview image 503 (third information). Then, at the start of displaying the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Further, since the content suggested by the first to third notice images is based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the display of the notice image causes the effect mode D (state C). ) Will be used as a reference for the development of the game afterwards, and it will be possible to enhance the game interest in the production mode D (state C). The mode (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65. For example, the horizontally long preview image display area U shown in FIG. 65 is displayed on the display screen 7a. A vertically long notice image display area U is provided on the left or right side of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are provided in the notice image display area U in the vertical direction (vertical direction). It is possible to take various aspects such as making it possible to display them side by side.

The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters "big hit", the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters "continue", and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters "mode E". Will be done. In this embodiment, when displaying the notice image, two types of notice images are displayed, and as the display pattern (combination of the notice images), that is, the notice effect pattern, "1st notice image 501" shown in FIG. 65 (c). And a first display pattern for displaying the "second notice image 502" and a second display pattern for displaying the "second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503" shown in FIG. 65 (d). .. In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying "first notice image 501 and third notice image 503" may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that three types of preview images are provided. For example, when the 15R 3rd jackpot and the 4R 4th jackpot are separately (distinguished) and announced, or when there are more types of jackpots. More types of preview images may be provided, such as providing a preview image according to the type of the jackpot. Also in this case, at least two types of preview images may be configured to be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (preliminary effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

Which of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502, and the third preview image 503 is displayed is determined by the type of preview effect (preliminary effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when the reach out-of-reach variation is performed (reach out-of-reach variation effect pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 and from the start of the change. The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is caused by the stop of the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R). It is continued until the reach failure is confirmed. Then, when the reach failure is confirmed after the start of the display of the notice image (after the start of the information display effect), the notice image displayed up to that point is deleted from the screen. In this case, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

Here, the display pattern determination (selection) when displaying the preview image is determined by the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, which is referred to when setting the advance notice effect by displaying the preview image in S4506, and 0 to 0. It is supposed to be performed based on a display pattern determination random number that takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selection rate of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by the display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach deviation fluctuation, both the display of the notice image by the first display pattern and the display of the notice image by the second display pattern can be executed. In this embodiment, the former can be executed. The latter is more feasible than the latter (selection rate of the first display pattern "30%", selection rate of the second display pattern "70%").

On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot). That is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the variation display (big hit variation effect pattern), the third effect is before the display of the jackpot mode (before the derivation display). A third effect (variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern) based on pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. After the variation display is stopped (after the jackpot mode is displayed), the jackpot game is performed, and then the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (first variation effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which ally characters win. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), a notice image is displayed (information display production) at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the start of the third effect (battle effect), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when the reach is established. Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player is at least as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is a possibility that the game in the state C will end (the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player receives a 2R jackpot at that time. The possibility (the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous) cannot be ruled out.

Here, in this embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect (battle effect that wins the ally) based on the third effect pattern A is executed due to the jackpot fluctuation is displayed as the first display pattern rather than the second display pattern. The display pattern is more likely to be executed (see FIG. 66). Therefore, in the display of the preview image by the first display pattern, the degree of expectation of the ally victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode and the jackpot is compared with the display of the preview image by the second display pattern. It can be said that the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) that the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. In addition, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the "strong ally pattern" due to the jackpot fluctuation, the feasibility of displaying the preview image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the "strong ally pattern" and the display of the notice image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the start of displaying the notice image (for example, the ally character and the enemy). At the start of the character's confrontation, at a predetermined time before the end of the battle such as during the confrontation), the first preview image 501 (big hit) may be displayed in the preview image display area U in a larger size than at the beginning of the display. (See FIG. 65 (e)). The enlarged display of the notice image is based on the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the notice effect pattern including the enlarged display of the notice image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the notice image is displayed. Will be done. Further, along with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than the initial display start, or is erased (erased in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, there is a possibility that the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is due to a strong ally pattern, and that a big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) occurs as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It is possible to suggest to the player that the value is high and to increase the player's sense of expectation and security. When the first notice image 501 is enlarged and displayed and the second notice image 502 is erased, the display may be used to announce the confirmation of the big hit (big hit confirmation notification). Further, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first notice image 501 is further enlarged and the second notice image 502 is erased. The display mode of the preview image displayed on the U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the notice image, for example, the character of "big hit" in the first notice image 501 may be changed to "super big hit" suggesting a 15R big hit, or the character of "big hit" and its background color may be changed. The characters, colors, shapes, etc. that make up the preview image may be changed, such as by changing to the color of. Further, such a change in characters and the like and a change in display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be combined and configured to be executable.

On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the "strong ally pattern", that is, a "weak ally pattern", a "strong enemy pattern", or a "weak enemy pattern". In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the third effect (battle effect) or the variable display. It is possible to enlarge the first preview image 501 even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the "strong ally pattern". In this case, the "strong ally pattern" is used. It is sufficient to reduce the feasibility of the enlarged display (change in display mode) as compared with the above. In this way, the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display of the preview image (change in display mode) becomes easy to understand.

In addition, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is performed as an out-of-reach variation (reach out-of-reach variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being out of alignment, that is, , When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach looseness (out-of-reach mode) as a result of the variation display (reach out-of-reach variation effect pattern), before the display of the deviation mode (before the derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win / loss unwinned) The third effect (variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the third effect pattern C (third variation effect pattern) is a confrontation (battle) without determining the outcome. It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the fluctuation (out-of-reach fluctuation), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when the reach is established, at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the start of the third production (battle production), the first preview image 501 and the first notice image 501 and the first 2 The display of the notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed by the first display pattern, the player is unlikely to generate at least a 2R jackpot (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). Can be inferred. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed by the second display pattern, the player may have at least a big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no such thing. In this embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect (battle effect of undecided victory or defeat) based on the third effect pattern C is executed due to the out-of-reach fluctuation is displayed as the first display pattern and the second display. The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

Here, since the display (big hit or continuation) of the preview image by the first display pattern is also a display suggesting that the game in the state C can be executed even after that, the game in the state C is completed. It does not give the player anxiety that it will end up. On the other hand, the display of the preview image by the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, and it may not be possible to continue the game in the state C. Since it also includes sex, it gives the player such anxiety. The display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a reach out-of-reach fluctuation is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between a ally character and an enemy character or at a predetermined time at the end of the confrontation). , Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (first notice image 501 or third notice image 503) are deleted (change in display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player recognizes that as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), the big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) is not generated and the player is out of the game, and the game in the state C is continued. Can be done. In this way, the display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

In addition, in the reach out-of-reach fluctuation, the jackpot mode is not displayed as a result of the fluctuation display (big hit occurs), so that the first preview image as described above is displayed in the preview image by the first display pattern. The 501 magnified display is not performed. Further, in the reach out-of-reach variation, after starting the display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 among them may be configured to be feasible. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the state C in which small hits occur frequently, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not give the player a profit due to the occurrence of the big hit. Since it is foretold (suggested) that the continuity of the state C is high, it is possible to alleviate the anxiety of the player such that the game in the state C ends.

Further, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots). When it is performed as a 2R jackpot variation, that is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in reach variation (2R jackpot mode) as a result of the variation display (2R jackpot variation effect pattern), before the display of the 2R jackpot mode (before derivation display) ), The third effect (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (defeat pattern of allies) is performed. After the variation display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), the 2R jackpot game is performed, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes state B (high base state), and the game in state C is continued. Since it cannot be done, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which a ally character is defeated. Then, in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation), the second preview image 502 and the second preview image 502 and the second at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the start of the third production (battle production), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when the reach is established. 3 The display of the preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. From the display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot occurring (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). be able to. In this embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect (battle effect of defeat of allies) based on the third effect pattern B is executed due to the 2R jackpot fluctuation is not executed in the first display pattern. It is assumed that the execution is performed only with the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C ends due to the occurrence of the 2R jackpot, even though the notice image is displayed by the first display pattern (a notice effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development) (relative). This is because it is terrible for the player. By doing so, when the notice image is displayed and the third effect (battle effect) is matched, and when the notice image is displayed (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect) is executed, the player feels uncomfortable or distrustful. It is possible not to give a feeling.

After that, the display of the preview image by the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the display starts (for example, during a confrontation between a ally character and an enemy character or at a predetermined time at the end of the confrontation). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is erased (change in display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player can recognize that two big hits (any of the 2R 5th to 8th big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C has come to an end. it can. In this way, the display of the preview image in which only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

As described above, in the effect mode D, when the reach variation or the reach deviation variation is performed, the content (game development) of the game that can be executed after the variation is announced (suggested) based on the variation effect pattern related to the variation. The notice image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (notice image display area U). In this preview image, the first preview image 501 (first information) that announces (suggests) the occurrence of a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot) that triggers the setting of state C (high accuracy and low base state). And the second preview image 502 (second information) that announces (suggests) the continuation of the state C, and the announcement (suggestion) that the game state shifts to the state B (end of the game in the state C) triggered by the 2R jackpot. ) Third notice image 503 (third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern composed of a combination of the 502 and the third preview image 503. The display of the preview image based on such a first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed from the start of the change in the reach deviation variation before the reach failure is confirmed, and in the reach variation from the start of the variation in the third effect. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle production) becomes clear (before the battle production or the end of the fluctuation), state C (advantageous state where small hits occur frequently) continues (wins) triggered by the fluctuation. , Undecided) or finished (defeated), it is possible to obtain a directing effect that arouses the expectations and anxieties of the player. In addition, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the mode of the third production (battle production) (strong ally pattern, weak ally pattern, etc.) in the fluctuation, the third production is executed after the display of the preview image is started. At a predetermined time during the middle (during battle production), the display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed. Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest to the preview image being displayed, and suggests that the later game development is likely to be advantageous to the player at an early stage before the end of the change. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C will be described. As described above, when the game state is controlled to the state C (high accuracy and low base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the effect mode to be set is selected. Is configured to be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high accuracy and low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot" are jackpots that trigger the setting of state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), The effect modes C and D can be selected at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period is generated in which the effect mode after the end of the big hit game can be selected from the two effect modes C and D. The occurrence time (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period is different between "4R 1st jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot" and "15R 3rd jackpot". The control process related to the effect mode selection, such as the generation of the mode selection period and the selection of the effect mode based on the operation of the first effect button 63a during the mode selection period, is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). It is executed under control, and specifically, it is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

First, in the state A (left-handed game), the jackpot symbol (specific display result) is displayed and the "4R first jackpot" occurs, that is, the "4R first jackpot" occurs as the first hit, and the state. Mode selection when the jackpot symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and "4R 4th jackpot" occurs, that is, when "4R 4th jackpot" occurs as a consecutive villa hit The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game are completed. Here, as described above, when the final round of the jackpot game is completed (when the value of the round counter becomes "0"), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the jackpot ending command and sets the jackpot ending command. (S2116), the ending period of the jackpot starts (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, "4R ending command" for "4R 1st jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot", and "15R ending command" for "15R 3rd jackpot". It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time related to the 4R jackpot game is set to "15 seconds", and the ending time related to the 15R jackpot game is set to "5". Seconds ". The ending time shown in this embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly consists of an image 701 showing "effect mode C" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode C selection image") and an image 702 showing "effect mode D" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode D selection image"). And are arranged side by side, and an image 703 (hereinafter, also referred to as “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right sides. By displaying the mode selection screen 700 in this way, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress.

When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, the image 701 (mode C selection image) and the image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternate with each operation. It is highlighted and the highlighted image (that is, the effect mode) is represented as being selected (see FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b)). In this embodiment, the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (highlighted) as surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). There is. Therefore, the player selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high accuracy and low base state) by operating the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is set to 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in a mode in which the numerical image 704 is displayed by subtracting 1 each from “3” → “2” → “1”. By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the number image 704 becomes "1" in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed in a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). After that, until the ending period ends, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D) is set. The production design game production is executed.

On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and "15R 3rd big hit" occurs, that is, "15R 3rd big hit" occurs as a consecutive villa hit. If so, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, of 1R to 15R, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , It becomes possible for the sub-control unit side to recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), such as "1R start command", "2R start command" ... "15R start command".

When the sub-control unit 90 receives the start of the round game immediately before 14R (predetermined round game), which is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the "13R start command" for designating the start of 13R, the sub-control unit 90 responds to this. The round effect command to be performed is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the round effect of 13R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63A, the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period will start from the next round (14R in this embodiment) (notification before the start of the selection period, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the production mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the production mode in a new mode such as the occurrence (start) of the production mode selection period is reached. You can choose. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection.

The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image showing the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1 and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is additionally displayed for each winning ball based on the entry into the first big winning opening 30 during the big hit game (reception of the first big winning opening entry command). It is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game is completed, and the ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game after that and the first big in the big hit game. It is also displayed in addition by entering the winning opening 30. Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 displays the total number of prize balls won during the period from the first hit to the consecutive villa period.

Next, when the sub-control unit 90 receives the "14R start command" that specifies the start of the 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 transmits the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). To do. In response to this, the round effect of 14R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). The mode selection screen 900 is displayed in. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above, and is assumed to be a reduced version of the mode selection screen 700. There is. By displaying the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The effect mode selection (up and down swapping of the mode selection images) on the mode selection screen 900 is the same procedure as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above based on FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, a detailed description of the effect mode selection in 14R will be omitted. The screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from a part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed during the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode may be applied to the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

Next, when the sub-control unit 90 receives the "15R start command" that specifies the start of the 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 issues a round effect command corresponding to the "15R start command" to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ). In response to this, a round effect of 15R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). The mode selection screen 900 is displayed in. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started at the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display (see FIG. 62 (c)) on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above, and the numerical image changes from "3" to "2" as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have passed from the start of 15R), and the mode selection period ends.

After that, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed together with the round effect screen 800 on the display screen 7a, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D) is set. The production design game production is executed.

In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high accuracy and low base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to the "effect mode C" at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. A mode selection period for selecting from "" or "effect mode D" occurs. Regarding the occurrence time (start time) of this mode selection period, a 4R first big hit occurred in the state A (left-handed game) and a 15R third big hit occurred in the state B or C (right-handed game). The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the time when the mode selection period occurs differs between the first hit in the state A, which is the game state in which the left-handed game is performed, and the consecutive villa hit in the state B or C, which is the game state in which the right-handed game is performed. It has become a thing. Another way of thinking is that the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, the 4R jackpot game (4R 1st jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot) or the 15R jackpot game (15R 3rd jackpot). The time when the mode selection period occurs differs depending on whether or not the mode is selected. For this reason, depending on the game state when a big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive villa hit) and the type of big hit game to be executed, the time when the effect mode can be selected may be different, or the effect mode may be selected. It is possible to change the mode.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all the round games are completed, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, the mode selection period occurs (starts) from 14R to 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in 13R before the mode selection period occurs (before the start). , The notification screen 810 notifying that the mode selection period is started from the next round is displayed (notification before the start of the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. It is displayed (notification during the selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and a countdown display is executed at 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c), (d)). In this way, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after all the round games are completed, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the production mode by the end of all the round games. Given to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player regarding the effect mode selection.

Further, the ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and in the 4R jackpot, the mode selection period is generated by using the ending period. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the negative image for the player, such as the number of rounds (number of winning prize balls) being small and the execution period of the big hit game being short compared to the 15R big hit, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. Become.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the jackpot game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). There is. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from before the start to the end of the mode selection period, notification (selection period) related to the effect mode selection. Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Arrangement of image display device]
Next, an arrangement mode of the image display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes three image display devices (display means) of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Of these three image display devices, the first image display device 7 has a display screen 7a (display surface) facing the opening provided in the substantially center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back surface side (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front left and right sides of the front frame 51, respectively (see FIG. 1).

Here, as shown in FIG. 1, on the vertically long rectangular front frame 51, the surface (game board surface) of the game board 2 is placed in front of the game machine (front side) with the front frame 51 closed (closed state). ) Is provided with a visual recognition window 51a (visual recognition portion) that can be visually recognized. The viewing window 51a is made of a transparent glass plate, and has a vertically long substantially elliptical shape that occupies most of the area above the ball hitting plate 61. Through the viewing window 51a (glass plate), the player can see the game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 and the display screen 7a (display content) of the first image display device 7 arranged on the back side of the game board 2. ) Etc. can be visually recognized. Further, as described above, the front frame 51 is pivotally supported by frame hinges 56, 56 provided at the upper and lower corners on one side end side (left side side in this embodiment) so as to be openable and closable (rotatable). There is.

In the present embodiment, the second image display device 71 is provided on the front surface of such a front frame 51 and above the one side end side (left side side) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported, and one side thereof. A third image display device 72 is provided on the upper portion of the other side end side (right side side) facing the end side (left side side) (see FIG. 1). The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 both consist of a liquid crystal display device that is smaller than the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3), and display a square shape that is close to a substantially square shape. It has screens 71a and 72a. Further, in the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the front frame 51 keeps the display screens 71a and 72a substantially straight in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the front view. It is configured to be inclined toward the side of the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51). As shown in FIG. 1, the degree of inclination of the display screens 71a and 72a is such that the angle formed by the viewing window 51a with the window surface (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is an obtuse angle for each display screen. The inside angle is set to a predetermined angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees), so that a player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a from the front side (front side) of the gaming machine. ing. In this way, since the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), the game area 3 and the first image display device 7 pass through the viewing window 51a. For a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the display screen 7a (display content), the display screens 71a and 72a (display content) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be visually recognized with a small movement of the line of sight. Is possible. The display contents of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 will be described later.

The first image display device 7 provided on the back side of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) is also referred to as a "board side display means" or a "first display means", and is referred to as a front frame 51 (game area 3). The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the outside) are also referred to as "frame-side display means" or "second display means", and the second image display device 71 is referred to as "first frame". It is also referred to as "side display means" or "left display means", and the third image display device 72 is also referred to as "second frame side display means" or "right display means".

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, among the frame-side display means, the second image display device 71 (first frame-side display means) is provided on the upper front surface on one side end side (left side side) of the front frame 51. It is rotatably supported by the hinge 75 for the second image display device with respect to the front frame 51. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means) is not rotatably supported like the second image display device 71, but is on the other end side (right side side) of the front frame 51. ) Is fixed to the upper part of the front surface. As described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are configured (arranged) so that the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), respectively. However, since the second image display device 71 is rotatable in the horizontal direction about the axis of the second image display device hinge 75, it is in an inclined state (initial state, first state). A state) and a state in which the viewing window 51a is further inclined (tilted state, second state) can be taken. That is, the angle formed by the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined first angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees). It is possible to take an initial state (first state) and a tilted state (second state) in which the angle formed by the angle is a predetermined second angle (for example, 80 to 100 degrees) smaller than the first angle. It has become. On the other hand, since the third image display device 72 is fixed to the front frame 51, the angle formed by the display screen 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is predetermined. It is fixed at an angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees).

As described above, the reason why the second image display device 71 is configured to be rotatable so that the initial state (first state) and the tilted state (second state) can be taken is as follows. That is, it is possible to lend a game ball (ball lending) to the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall based on the value information recorded on a recording medium (game value storage medium) such as a prepaid card. A card unit 135 (a device for renting a game ball or the like) is provided, and the card unit 135 and a pachinko game machine 1 (pachinko game machine 110) are connected (see FIG. 5). The card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is usually adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, the card unit 135 is located on one side end side (left side) where the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are pivotally supported. For this reason. When the front frame 51 is opened or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened, the front frame 51 is the axis of the frame hinges 56, 56 on one side end side (left side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It will rotate horizontally to the card unit 135 side (left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) around the center. At this time, if a frame-side effect means such as a frame-side display means or a frame-side movable accessory is provided on one side end side (the front surface on the left side side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 or the like is pivotally supported, The frame-side effect means may come into contact with the card unit 135 and hinder the opening of the front frame 51 or the like (rotation to the card unit 135 side). In this regard, if the second image display device 71 is configured to be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a, which is the side facing the card unit 135, as in the present embodiment, the front frame 51 By tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (in a tilted state) when the second image display device 71 is opened, the presence of the second image display device 71 hinders the opening of the front frame 51 or the like. It is possible to open the front frame 51 and the like without any trouble.

Further, in a state where both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are closed, that is, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, the operation unit of the card unit 135 is operated to record on a card (recording medium). When receiving the payout of the ball held based on the information held on the ball or taking out the card (recording medium) from the card unit 135, it is assumed that the operation position and the card removal position are in the vicinity of the second image display device 71. However, by tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (in a tilted state), it is possible to smoothly perform the operation, take out, and the like. The second image display device 71 is rotatable in view of the opening of the front frame 51 and the operation of the card unit 135 and the like. As a result, a second image display device 71 (first frame side display means, left display means) is provided as a frame side display means on one side end side (left side side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. It is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode such as, and it is possible to make the appearance of the gaming machine feel novel, which has never been seen before. In particular, as in this embodiment, not only one side end side (the left side side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported, but also the other side end side (front frame 51) facing the one side end side. By providing a third image display device 72 (second frame side display means, right display means) on the right side) as the frame side display means, the front frame 51 constituting the front side (front side) of the gaming machine is novel. The novelty of the appearance of the gaming machine becomes even more remarkable. Such novelty in appearance is effective in motivating the player to play.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a mechanism (maintenance means) for maintaining the second image display device 71, which can take an initial state and a tilted state, in the initial state. Specifically, as a means for maintaining the second image display device 71 in the initial state, a torsion coil spring (not shown) that urges the second image display device 71 toward one side end side (left end side) of the front frame 51. Is provided in the vicinity of the hinge 75 for the second image display device. The second image display device 71 is maintained in the initial state by the urging force of the torsion coil spring (urging means). Therefore, in order to tilt the second image display device 71, for example, the back surface side (the surface opposite to the display screen 71a) of the second image display device 71 is manually pushed to obtain a torsion coil spring (a urging means). By applying a force contrary to the urging force of the above to the second image display device 71, the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a. Further, when the front frame 51 or the like is opened and the back surface of the second image display device 71 comes into contact with the card unit 135, the force applied to the back surface of the second image display device 71 by the contact causes the second image display device 71 to come into contact with the card unit 135. It will tilt (rotate) toward the viewing window 51a. On the other hand, when the force for tilting (rotating) the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (the force contrary to the urging force of the torsion coil spring) is released, the second image display device 71 has a torsion coil spring (attached). It returns to the original initial state by the urging force of the force means). As a result, under the situation where the front frame 51 is closed, the second image display device 71 can be kept in the initial state, and the display screen 71a (display content) of the second image display device 71 can be visually recognized well. Sex can be ensured. Further, the second image display device 71 tilted toward the viewing window 51a automatically returns to the initial state when the tilting force is released, so that the second image display is performed without any special operation or treatment. The device 71 can be reliably put into the initial state.

[Display contents of image display device]
Next, the display contents of the three image display devices included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In the image display devices (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and third image display device 72) included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect), the advance notice effect (suggestion effect), Various production displays such as jackpot game production and demo production can be executed (effect display execution means). In the following, the display contents of the image display device will be described with a focus on the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the advance notice effect (suggestion effect) when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accuracy low base state). ..

[Display contents of production design game production]
First, the display contents of the image display device when the effect symbol game effect is executed in the state A will be described. The effect display related to the effect symbol game effect is mainly executed by the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (see FIG. 54). In the state A, as described above, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode, so that the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 has a background image corresponding to the effect mode A or B. It is displayed, and the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a under the background display. Then, depending on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect pattern set at the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 8, the effect display related to the reach effect, the advance notice effect, and the like is added to the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). It may also be executed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) or the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). That is, when the effect display is mainly performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and the effect display is supplementarily performed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. There is. For this reason, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is also referred to as a "main display device" or a "main liquid crystal", and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 ( The display screen 72a) is also referred to as a "sub-display device" or a "sub-liquid crystal".

In this embodiment, as the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the effect symbol 8, a variation mode without reach (normal variation) and a variation mode with reach (reach variation) are provided, and as a type of reach effect, Normal reach production and super reach production (also called "SP reach") are provided. Therefore, when the reach variation is executed, one of the reach effects is set in the above-mentioned S4505 based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Then, when the super reach effect is executed, the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) is set to be higher than when the normal reach effect is executed.

When the sub-control unit 90 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 80 (S4403) based on the specification of the fluctuation effect, the first image is displayed based on the variation effect pattern set in response to the command. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the device 7 (variable display starting means). The specific variation display described later is the case where the variation display is a normal variation without reach, the reach variation due to the normal reach effect (also referred to as "normal reach variation"), and the reach variation due to the super reach effect (also referred to as "SP reach variation"). In the case of the SP reach variation excluding the SP reach variation, the variation display and the effect display such as the reach related to the variation are displayed by the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) from the start to the end as shown in FIG. ), And not on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). However, as will be described later, the advance notice effect (suggestion effect, suggestion display) regarding the variation display and the later variation display (variation display based on the special figure hold) is performed by the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third. It may be performed on either one or both of the image display device 72 (display screen 72a). Note that FIG. 67 shows an example of normal fluctuation without reach. Further, the effect display related to the reach effect (normal reach variation, SP reach variation) is also referred to as "specific display".

Here, a predetermined background image (predetermined display) is usually displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (predetermined display executing means). This background image is different from the background image (not shown) displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 on which the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and is a common background in the effect modes A and B. It is an image, and is a unique (dedicated) background image (predetermined display) when the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 do not perform the effect display related to the variation effect, the advance notice effect, or the like. For this reason, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is also referred to as the "main background" or "main background", and the background image displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a is referred to as the "sub-background". Also called "sub-background". In FIG. 67 and the like, the background images (sub-background, sub-background) displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are shaded.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the secondary background is displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 71a (left) is displayed. The display means) is supposed to display a fluctuation number image 710 (predetermined display) indicating the number of fluctuations of the symbol. The variation number image 710 shows the number of executions (variation number) of the variation display of the special symbol (and the effect symbol) performed until the next big hit occurs, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed once. Every time (in this embodiment, each end of the fluctuation display), the number of fluctuations indicated by the fluctuation number image 710 is added by 1 and displayed. The display of the fluctuation number image 710 is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) based on the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 80 (predetermined display execution means). On the other hand, on the display screen 72a (right display means) on which the sub-background is displayed, an effect mode image 720 (predetermined display) indicating the current effect mode is displayed. The effect mode image 720 gives the name of the effect mode (for example, XX mode corresponding to the effect mode A, △△ mode corresponding to the effect mode B, etc.) indicating the type of the effect mode currently set in the state A. It is shown and the display is performed based on the mode status set under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) (predetermined display execution means).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 to be executed is the specific SP reach variation among the SP reach variations, as an execution mode of the variation display (effect display) related to the specific SP reach variation, in this embodiment, There are roughly two modes. Specifically, one of the modes is a reach state from the beginning of the fluctuation display related to the specific SP reach fluctuation, and the reach effect (specific SP reach effect) related to the fluctuation is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). ), The second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) (also referred to as “first aspect”). In another aspect, at the beginning of the variation display related to the specific SP reach variation, the effect display related to the variation is executed only by the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and after the reach is established, the effect content is displayed. When developing into SP reach, any of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is added to the first image display device 7 to display the effect related to the fluctuation. It is a mode (also referred to as “second mode”) in which one or both are executed.

In this embodiment, if the ally character and the enemy character confront the content (production mode) of the specific SP reach production executed in the state A (effect mode A or B) and the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit and is defeated. The content is out of the question. Such a specific SP reach production is also referred to as a "specific production". As this specific effect, the first specific effect (effect display based on the first aspect) executed based on the above-mentioned first aspect (three-screen display from the beginning) and the above-mentioned second aspect (initially one-screen display). It is provided with a second specific effect, which is later executed based on a two-screen display or a three-screen display). Further, as the second specific effect (effect display based on the second aspect), the variation display (specific SP reach variation) including the effect (specific SP reach effect) is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7. The "second specific effect A", which is later executed by the second image display device 71, and the "second", which is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and later executed by the third image display device 72, are also executed. It includes a "specific effect B" and a "second specific effect C" that is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and later executed by the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. ing. Therefore, when the specific SP reach variation is executed, any one of those specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) is the variation pattern designation command and variation in the above-mentioned S4505. It is set based on the effect pattern determination table, and the set specific effect is executed (specific display execution means, effect display execution means).

Next, the display contents of the image display device when the specific effect is executed will be described. First, when the first specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68, a state in which reach is established on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 from the beginning of the variable display (effect display) (reach state). ), And a production display indicating the start of the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is performed. At this time, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) in the reach state are displayed small on the left and right upper parts of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the effect display indicating the start of the confrontation on substantially the entire display screen 7a. (See the middle section of FIG. 68). Further, at this time, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, instead of the sub-background and the variation number image 710, the sub-character on the ally character side involved in the confrontation (battle) related to the specific effect (“friend”). (Also referred to as "sub-character") is displayed, and on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, instead of the sub-background and the effect mode image 720, the sub of the enemy character involved in the confrontation (battle) related to the specific effect is displayed. A character (also referred to as an "enemy sub-character") is displayed (see the middle section of FIG. 68). Then, as the variable display progresses, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the progress process, "the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character. "Production display", "Enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Friend sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (friend character side)" "Enemy display", "Enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)" and the like are performed.

After that, in the first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 69, an effect display (ally victory scene) in which the ally character side (friend character, ally sub-character) wins over the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed. Then, the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stopped) in doublet (big hit mode) (see FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (friend defeat scene) in which the ally character side (friend character, ally sub-character) is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the fluctuation is out of reach (reach out-of-reach change) Therefore, the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stopped) in the reach disjointed pattern (off mode) (see FIG. 69 (b)).

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect display of the final scene (the ally victory scene or the ally defeat scene) indicating the end of the confrontation in the specific effect (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) is mainly displayed on the display screen 7a. Executed on (main LCD). Then, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally victory scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the left display screen 71a The characters "win" are displayed on the right side, and the characters "profit" are displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, and the characters "win" are displayed on the display screens of the two sub liquid crystals. On the other hand, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally defeat scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), the display screen 71a on the left side is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (b). The characters "defeat" are displayed on the right side, and the characters "north" are displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, and the characters "defeat" are displayed on the display screens of the two sub liquid crystals.

Further, when the second specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70, the variable display (effect display) is started on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and when the reach is established thereafter, the variable display (effect display) is started. The left symbol (directed symbol 8L) and the right symbol (directed symbol 8R) that have been stopped (temporarily stopped) due to the establishment of reach are displayed small on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the entire display screen 7a is displayed as a ally character. An effect display indicating the start of the confrontation between the enemy characters is performed, and subsequently, an effect display indicating the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is started. During this period, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the sub-background and the like are displayed without performing any special effect display related to the variable display (described later). (Except when the notice production of) is performed). Up to this point, the display contents are common to the second specific effects A to C.

Then, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect A (display screen 7a → display screens 7a, 71a), as shown in FIG. 71, the effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a. Shortly afterwards, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the display screen 71a gradually decreases, and the silhouette of the ally sub-character is reduced in the decreasing area. Is displayed (the appearance of a ally sub-character). When the ally sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a through this ally sub-character appearance effect, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. , "Direction display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character" and "Direction display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (friend character side)" Etc. are performed. In such a second specific effect A, when the effect display (friend victory scene) in which the ally character side (friend character, ally sub-character) wins the enemy character is performed, the change is a big hit change, and the effect symbol 8 Is displayed (stopped) in doublet (big hit mode) (see display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (ally defeat scene) in which the ally character side (friend character, ally sub-character) is defeated by the enemy character is performed, the fluctuation becomes an out-of-reach change (reach out-of-reach change), and the effect symbol 8 Is displayed (stopped) in the reach disjointed pattern (off mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

Although the ally sub-character appearance effect was started on the display screen 71a, the ally sub-character appearance effect was completed before the ally sub-character was displayed on the entire display screen 71a, and the entire display area of the display screen 71a was the sub-background. It is also possible to provide a pattern that returns to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide a sub-character appearance effect for Gase's ally. In this case, the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

Further, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect B (display screen 7a → display screens 7a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 72, the effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a. Shortly afterwards, on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen 72a gradually decreases, and the silhouette of the enemy sub-character is reduced in the decreasing area. Is displayed (enemy sub-character appearance production). When the enemy sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this enemy sub-character appearance effect, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. "Enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. Is done. In such a second specific effect B, when the effect display (ally victory scene) in which the ally character wins over the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the change is a big hit change, and the effect symbol 8 Is displayed (stopped) in doublet (big hit mode) (see display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (ally defeat scene) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the fluctuation becomes an out-of-reach change (reach out-of-reach change), and the effect symbol 8 Is displayed (stopped) in the reach disjointed pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

Although the enemy sub-character appearance effect was started on the display screen 72a, the enemy sub-character appearance effect was completed before the enemy sub-character was displayed on the entire display screen 72a, and the entire display area of the display screen 72a was the secondary background. It is also possible to provide a pattern that returns to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to set up an enemy sub-character appearance effect of Gase. In this case, the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

Further, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect C (display screen 7a → display screens 7a, 71a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 73, the effect display of the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a. Shortly after the start, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 on the display screens 71a and 72a gradually decreases. An effect display (sub-character appearance effect) is performed in which the silhouette of the ally sub-character (display screen 71a) and the silhouette of the enemy sub-character (display screen 72a) appear in the decreasing area. When the sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this sub-character appearance effect, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses, and the "display screen" is displayed. "Direction display in which the ally sub-character displayed on 71a supports the ally character", "Production display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Display screen of the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a" "Production display that moves to 7a and joins the confrontation (friendly character side)", "Production display that the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. are performed. .. In such a second specific effect C, when the effect display (ally victory scene) in which the ally character side (friend character, ally sub-character) wins over the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the change is a big hit change. Therefore, the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stopped) in doublet (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (friend defeat scene) in which the ally character side (friend character, ally sub-character) is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the fluctuation is out of reach (reach out-of-reach change). Therefore, the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stopped) in the reach disjointed pattern (off mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

Although the sub-character appearance effects are started on the display screens 71a and 72a, the sub-character appearance effects in which the ally sub-characters and the enemy sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen are completed, and the display areas of the display screens 71a and 72a are displayed. It is also possible to provide a pattern in which the entire display returns to the sub-background display. In other words, it is also possible to provide a sub-character appearance effect of Gase. In this case, the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

In view of the fact that the jackpot reliability of the second specific effects A to C is a jackpot when the ally character wins, the jackpot reliability of the second specific effect A (friend character, ally sub-character VS enemy character) is the highest. The jackpot reliability is set in the order of the second specific effect C (friend character, ally sub character VS enemy character, enemy sub character) and the second specific effect B (ally character VS enemy character, enemy sub character). It is set to be low.

As described above, the effect pattern game effect that can be executed in the state A has been illustrated, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 also has various variable effects (variable effect patterns) with different display contents (effect modes). Needless to say, this can also be performed by using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In particular, regarding the effect display (specific display) related to the reach effect, as in the above-mentioned first specific effect and second specific effect, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display It is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect by providing an embodiment using one or both of the devices 72.

As described above, when the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is executed in the state A, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is mainly used as the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). The effect display to which either one or both of the three image display devices 72 (display screen 72a) is added can be executed. Therefore, after the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7, regarding the effect display related to the variation, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image It is possible to draw the player's attention to the display device 72 as well, and it is possible to display a wide range inside and outside the game area. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with an impact, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the variation display based on the specific SP reach variation is executed, that is, when the specific effect (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) is executed, the variation display is performed. There is a mode (first mode) in which the effect display is executed by the three image display devices from the beginning of the above, and the effect display is executed by the first image display device 7 at the beginning of the variable display, and then the second image. There is also a mode (second mode) in which the effect display is executed by either or both of the display device 71 and the third image display device 72. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from becoming uniform, and to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

Further, when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed, the variable display is initially started by the first image display device 7, and then the reach is established and the effect display showing the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character. Is started on the display screen 7a, the display area of one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is gradually reduced, and the reduced amount of display is displayed. The area changes to the display area of the sub-character appearance effect. That is, the effect of gradually expanding the display area of the effect display related to the fluctuation from the first image display device 7 to one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is executed. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed.

[Display contents of notice production]
Next, the display contents of the image display device when the advance notice effect is executed in the state A (low accuracy and low base state) will be described. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect is based on the effect hold information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in S4402 and the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506 (see FIG. 52). It is possible to execute (suggestion effect, suggestion display) (suggestion display execution means). In this embodiment, as a notice effect that can be executed by using the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, third image display device 72) in the state A (low accuracy low base state). , Equipped with multiple types of notice production. In the following, five types of the first notice effect to the fifth notice effect will be described. It should be noted that the notice effect described below is currently stored as a notice effect (the change notice) that suggests that the display result of the fluctuation display (the change) currently being executed may be a big hit (specific display result). There is a notice effect (hold look-ahead notice) that suggests that the display result of the variable display executed based on the special figure hold may be a big hit (specific display result).

First, the first notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the first effect hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit). It is a notice effect (also referred to as "effect hold notice") according to the display mode of 9a. This first notice effect (effect hold notice) is executed as a hold look-ahead notice. Since the state A is a low-accuracy low-base state, the variation display of the first special symbol is usually performed mainly. In response to this, in the state A, the hold notice is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the acquired information (first special figure hold) acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20. It is possible. The control related to the execution of the first notice effect (effect hold notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), and the preliminary determination result of the first special figure hold is the sub control unit 90 (effect control). The sub-control side can recognize the effect microcomputer 91) by referring to the effect hold information stored in the S4402.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, the effect hold notice is given by the display color of the first effect hold 9a. For this reason, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is provided with a normal color corresponding to the case where the effect hold notice is not given and a notice color corresponding to the case where the effect hold notice is given. There is. The normal color is one kind of "white", and the notice color is three kinds of "blue", "green" and "red". The sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines whether or not to execute the effect hold notice when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (occurrence of the first special figure hold). , When the determination result to execute is obtained, the production hold notice is executed. As a condition for executing the effect hold notice, for example, at least one first special figure hold is stored (special figure 1 hold ball number ≥ 1), and the first special figure hold stored at that time is stored. If the production hold notice has not been given, a predetermined execution lottery may be held and it may be determined that the lottery will be won. It should be noted that the execution condition of the production hold notice is not limited to this, and for example, it is a condition that two or more first special figure reservations are stored, or even if the production hold notice is given, further production is performed. The hold notice may be made executable.

When executing the effect hold notice, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) executes the display color (notice color) of the first effect hold 9a, that is, the execution pattern of the effect hold notice (first notice effect pattern). ) Is determined. This determination is made based on the effect hold notice decision table shown in FIG. 74 (b), which is a kind of notice effect decision table, and the effect hold notice decision random number having a value in the range of 0 to 99. The sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) selects the first special figure hold that is the target of the effect hold notice based on the preliminary determination result (effect hold information), and the first special figure hold is "disengaged". Specify which of "hold 1", "off hold 2", "off hold 3", and "big hit hold" is used, and the display color (first notice effect pattern) of the first effect hold 9a corresponding to this is specified. , Production hold notice Determine (select) by referring to the determination table. Here, "disengagement hold 1" is the first special figure hold in which normal fluctuation (disengagement) is performed, and "disengagement hold 2" is the first special figure hold in which normal reach fluctuation (disengagement) is performed, and "disengagement hold". "3" is the first special figure hold in which the SP reach fluctuation (off) is performed, and "big hit hold" is the first special figure hold in which the jackpot fluctuation is performed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set to be the highest when the display color of the first effect hold 9a is "red", and thereafter, the jackpot reliability is set in the order of "green" and "blue". Is set to be low (see FIG. 74 (b)). In addition to the color of the production hold, the production hold notice can be given, for example, by the difference in the shape (design) and size of the production hold, and each element such as color, shape, and size. It is also possible to carry out by the combination of. Further, the execution timing of the effect hold notice is various timings such as when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (when the first special figure hold occurs) and when the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to

The second notice effect is executed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and is a notice effect according to the display mode of the variation number image 710 displayed on the display screen 71a (also referred to as "number display notice"). ). As described above, when the first image display device 7 performs an effect display such as a variable display of the effect symbol 8 and the sub-background is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display screen 71a is displayed. The variation number image 710 is displayed (see FIG. 67 and the like). The second notice effect (number display notice) uses the variation number image 710 (variation number display), and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 being executed by the first image display device 7 is displayed. Is executed as the fluctuation notice suggesting that there is a higher possibility that the display result of is a big hit (the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode) than usual.

The control related to the execution of the second notice effect (count display notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), and when the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the second image When the sub-background is displayed on the display device 71, it is determined whether or not to execute the number-of-times display notice by referring to the hit / fail determination result and the variation mode (variation effect pattern) related to the variation display that starts. Execution lottery, etc.) will be held. Then, when executing the number-of-times display notice, by setting the second notice effect pattern (number-of-times display notice pattern) as the notice effect related to the variable display (S4506), the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a is performed. At the same time, it is possible to execute the number display notice on the display screen 71a. The number display notice is set so that the feasibility is higher when the fluctuation display that triggers the execution is a normal fluctuation (off) than when it is a SP reach fluctuation (off) or a jackpot fluctuation. ing. In this embodiment, the display color of the variation number image 710 is usually "white", and the number display notice is given by changing the display color to "red". The mode of the number display notice is not limited to the change in the display color of the variation number image 710, and may be, for example, a change in the size, method (arithmetic numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.), position, etc. of the number display.

The third notice effect is executed by the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and is executed as the fluctuation notice and as a hold look-ahead notice. It may be executed. As shown in FIG. 75, this third notice effect is a notice effect with the motif of fireworks (also referred to as "fireworks notice"), and when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a, it is displayed. Along with this, fireworks are launched from the display screen 7a toward the display screen 71b, the background of the display screen 71b becomes the background of the starry sky, and then the fireworks are displayed on the display screen 71b. And the color of the fireworks suggests the reliability of the big hit. In this embodiment, four colors of "white", "blue", "green" and "red" are provided as the colors of the fireworks, and among them, "red" has the highest jackpot reliability, and hereinafter, "green", The jackpot reliability is set to decrease in the order of "blue" and "white".

The control related to the execution of the third notice effect (fireworks notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), but when it is executed as a hold look-ahead notice, the above-mentioned first notice effect (effect hold notice) is performed. ), It is possible to execute the fireworks notice in almost the same way. That is, when starting the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the type of the first special figure hold that triggered the execution of the fireworks notice by referring to the first special figure hold (effect hold information) stored at that time ( For example, the above-mentioned off hold 1-3, jackpot hold, etc.) are specified, and the color of the fireworks is determined (selected) as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) according to the specified type. It is possible to execute the fireworks notice on the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a together with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the screen 7a. In this case, the fireworks notice is executed every time the variable display is started until the notice target hold that triggered the execution of the fireworks notice (hold look-ahead notice) is exhausted.

Further, when the fireworks notice is executed as the change notice, when the change display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the hit / fail judgment result and the change mode (variation effect pattern) related to the started variation display are referred to. Then, by determining (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) (S4506), the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a are displayed together with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute fireworks notice. The determination (selection) of the third advance notice effect pattern (fireworks advance notice pattern) can be performed, for example, by referring to the fireworks advance notice determination table (not shown) as described in the above-mentioned effect hold advance notice. ..

The fourth notice effect is executed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), and may be executed as the change notice or as a hold look-ahead notice. As shown in FIG. 76, this fourth notice effect is a notice effect (also referred to as “chance zone notice”) in which the characters and background of the “chance zone” are displayed on the display screen 72a, and the fourth notice effect (chance When the zone notice) is executed, it is started with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, one type (character display of the chance zone) is set as the production mode (notice effect pattern) of the fourth advance notice effect (chance zone advance notice). However, it is of course possible to provide a plurality of modes such as the above-mentioned first notice effect (production hold notice) and third notice effect (fireworks notice).

The control related to the execution of the fourth advance notice effect (chance zone advance notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). However, when the advance notice effect is executed as a hold look-ahead advance notice, at least the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is displayed. It is possible to execute the chance zone notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a, provided that two or more first special figure reservations are stored at the time of starting. It has become. In this case, the chance zone notice is continuously executed until the notice target hold that triggered the execution of the chance zone notice (hold look-ahead notice) is exhausted. For example, when three 1st special figure reservations are stored and a chance zone notice is executed for the 3rd 1st special figure reservation, an effect symbol based on the 3rd 1st special figure reservation is executed. The characters "chance zone" continue to be displayed on the display screen 72a until the variable display of 8 is executed. Further, when the chance zone notice is executed as the change notice, when the change display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the fourth notice effect pattern (chance zone notice pattern) is set as the notice effect related to the change display. By setting (S4506), it is possible to execute the chance zone notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. In both cases where the chance zone notice is executed as a hold look-ahead notice or as the change notice, the first special figure hold or change display that triggers the execution is more than normal fluctuation (off). It is set so that the feasibility is higher in the case of SP reach fluctuation (off) or jackpot fluctuation.

The fifth notice effect is executed by using all of the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). Therefore, it is executed as a notice of the change due to the big hit change. In other words, it is a notice production of the big hit confirmation. In this embodiment, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol 8 performed as a jackpot variation (variable effect pattern), three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are doublet shortly after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 8. It has a full-rotation effect that changes at a low speed in the same state as the above, and the fifth advance notice effect is an effect (“full-rotation notice”) that announces (suggests) the execution (occurrence) of the full-rotation effect.

The control related to the execution of the fifth advance notice effect (full rotation advance notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), and when the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the variation is caused. In the case of a jackpot variation and an effect mode including a full rotation effect, it is possible to execute the full rotation advance notice by setting the fifth advance notice effect pattern (full rotation advance notice pattern) (S4506). In this embodiment, since the full rotation effect is positioned as a so-called "premier effect", the feasibility of the full rotation notice and the full rotation effect is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth notice effect (full rotation notice) of the present embodiment is "all" on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8. The characters "times" are displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the characters "turn" are displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). The characters "full rotation" are displayed by the three display screens of the screen 7a (main liquid crystal) and the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal) located on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a and located outside the game area 3. It has become. After a while from the execution of the full rotation notice (display of the characters "full rotation"), the effect symbols of the same number are displayed one digit on each of the three display screens, and the three display screens are doublet (big hit). Aspect) is displayed. That is, when viewed from the front, the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal) has the left symbol (effect symbol 8L), the center display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) has the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C), and the right display screen 72a (right sub). The right symbol (directed symbol 8R) is displayed on the liquid crystal) with the same number. This corresponds to the start of the full rotation effect. After that, with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the three display screens aligned in doublets, the screens are slowly scrolled from the top to the bottom ("111" to "999" are displayed in ascending order. Fluctuates slowly). After this scroll display (full rotation), any combination of "111" to "999" is stopped and displayed on each of the three display screens, and then the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are finally displayed. Is displayed (confirmed display) on the display screen 7a in a jackpot mode.

The above 1st to 5th notice effects may be executed independently, or a plurality of notice effects may be executed at the same time on the condition that the image display devices used for executing the notice effects do not overlap. Sometimes. As a mode in which a plurality of notice effects are executed at the same time, for example, the first image display device 7 executes the first notice effect (effect hold notice) while the second image display device 71 executes the second notice effect (number of times display). The mode of executing the notice) and the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) on the third image display device while executing the third notice effect (fireworks notice) on the first image display device 7 and the second image display device 71. There is a mode to carry out.

As described above, the advance notice effects (suggestion effects, suggestion displays) that can be executed in the state A have been illustrated, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various other advance notice effects (preliminary effect patterns) having different display contents (effect modes) It is possible to execute these using one or more of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Further, not only the state A (effect mode A, B) but also the advance notice effect that can be executed in the state B (effect mode E) and the state C (effect mode C, D) can be obtained by the first image display device 7, the first image display device 7. It can be executed by using one or more display devices of the two image display devices 71 and the third image display device 72. Further, a part or all of the above-mentioned first to fifth notice effects may be configured to be executable in the state B (effect mode E) and the state C (effect modes C and D).

As described above, when the advance notice effect (suggestion effect, suggestion display) related to the variation display is executed while the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the first image Not only the display device 7, but also the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can execute the advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the advance notice effect by the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) and the left side side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3). One or two or more image displays of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) located and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) located on the right side (outside of the game area 3) of the front frame 51. Since it is possible to execute the advance notice effect by the device, it is possible to display a wide range inside and outside the game area 3. As a result, it is possible to produce an impactful advance notice, and it is possible to increase the variation of the advance notice effect and enhance the interest. Among them, in the full rotation notice (fifth notice effect) for notifying the execution of the full rotation effect, the characters "full rotation" are displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a of the first to third image display devices. After that, the effect symbols having the same numbers are displayed one digit at a time on each of the three display screens 7a, 71a, and 72a, and the full rotation effect is performed while maintaining doublet, and among "111" to "999". After any combination of the above is stopped and displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display screen 7a in a jackpot mode. To be. As a result, with respect to the stop display (display of the stop effect symbol) of the effect symbol 8 mainly performed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the variation of the display of the stop effect symbol is increased and the stop effect symbol is displayed. It is possible to enhance the interest in the event.

In addition, when executing the first to fifth notice effects by the first to third image display devices, a plurality of notice effects are performed at the same time (with the same variable display) on the condition that the image display devices used do not overlap. It is possible to execute. In this case, since the advance notice effects of different modes are executed in each image display device, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the advance notice effects that are executed in combination. This makes it possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player.

[Other display contents]
As described above, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the advance notice effect are usually executed in the first image display device 7 corresponding to the main liquid crystal, and when a specific variable effect or advance notice effect is executed, the sub One or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 corresponding to the liquid crystal are used. Then, when such a specific variation effect or advance notice effect is not executed, the sub-background, the variation number image 710, and the effect mode image 720 are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. (See FIG. 67 and the like). In this embodiment, in addition to the variation number image 710 and the effect mode image 720, various information can be displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

For example, the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) can display information related to the setting of the gaming machine during the game or waiting for customers (waiting). Information on the settings of the gaming machine includes, for example, the volume of the sound effect (effect sound) output from the speaker 67, the brightness (brightness) of the display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, and the appearance rate of the predetermined fluctuation effect and the advance notice effect. There is information about the production environment. In this embodiment, on the left side of the upper surface of the ball hitting plate 61 (upper plate) (to the left of the first effect button 63a), an operating means such as an operation lever that can be operated by the player, in addition to the first effect button 63a ( (Not shown) is provided, and by operating the operating means while waiting for customers (waiting) or during a game, the above-mentioned information on the production environment is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It is supposed to be done. The player can operate the operation means for the production environment based on the displayed information to set the setting according to his / her preference. The operation means provided on the left side of the upper surface of the ball hitting plate 61 (upper plate) is operated by operating the firing handle 60 provided at the lower right of the front surface of the gaming machine with the right hand during the game. This is because it is considered normal that the player's right hand is occupied and the left hand is free because the game ball is fired. In this way, the setting related to the production environment is performed by using the operating means located on the left side of the center of the gaming machine and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) during the game (of the firing handle). It is possible to improve the convenience by making it possible to perform the operation related to the setting without any trouble even during the operation).

Further, for example, the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) displays information on specifications such as the jackpot probability and the probability variation rate (probability variation inrush rate) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while waiting for customers (waiting). It is possible. By displaying the information related to the specifications on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) provided on the front frame 51 in this way, for example, for a person who selects a gaming machine (model) to play a game in a gaming hall. , The front of the gaming machine without looking into the image display device (main liquid crystal) provided on the back side of the gaming board (inside the gaming area) of the gaming machine in the waiting state (standby state) from the front (front) of the gaming machine. It is possible to check the specifications just by looking at the display screen of the image display device (outside the gaming area) that protrudes to the side. This makes it easier to select a model to play in the game hall. Information on the specifications may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a).

In this way, when the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 do not execute the effect display related to the specific variation effect or the advance notice effect, the display devices (display screens 71a, 72a) display the sub-background or the sub-background. It is possible to perform other displays (predetermined display) that do not interfere with the effect executed by the first image display device 7, such as the variation number image 710, the effect mode image 720, the information on the setting of the game machine, and the information on the specifications. It has become. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first special symbol described later or the first special symbol described later). The variable display was made in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the 1st hit / miss judgment or the 2nd hit / miss judgment is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in this embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is multiple. It may be a number of times, or it may have a different number of open rounds. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , The so-called special figure 2 priority control process, the control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, and the so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the 1st special figure hold and the digestion of the 2nd special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the 1st special figure hold and the 2nd special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of jackpot probabilities. Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary determination) (“Processing at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205)”. See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the method of prior determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the start-in ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the specific period is started in the production mode D (state C, specific game state) in a situation where three or more small hit holds are continuously stored, during the specific period. Is displayed with the number of prize balls image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit production) based on the entry into the large prize opening for small hits, etc., and when the specific period ends, the prize is awarded. The number of winning prize balls shown by the ball count image C2 is added (totaled) to the number of winning prize balls (total number of winning prize balls, total number of winning prize balls) of the prize ball count image C1. It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (ball entry into the third starting port 26) occurs during a specific period, and the hold is determined to be a small hit hold by prior judgment (hold look-ahead). , May be configured to extend a particular period of time that is currently running. For example, suppose that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hit holds are stored in succession, and two small hit holds are consumed after the start. At this time, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "2". Under such circumstances, if a new second special figure hold occurs, the number of special figure 2 hold balls becomes "3", and it is determined in advance that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005). Is "+1" (1 addition). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (memorized) small hit hold is digested and the small hit game related to the small hit hold is completed. Alternatively, in the same way, after the specific period is started, in the situation where two small hit hold balls are exhausted and the number of special figure 2 hold balls becomes "2", it corresponds to the special figure 2 hold ball number "3". It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "4" occur in quick succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "3" is an off hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "4" is a small hit hold in advance. It is assumed that it is judged. In this case, by adding "+2" (2 additions) to the specific period counter (see S5005), the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "4" is digested, and the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the prize ball number image S and the prize ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit production) is performed. Since it will be extended, it is possible to further enhance the effect of producing profits.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are set as the start of the specific period. Although it was a condition, the start condition for a specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of (for example, two or more) small hit holds that are not continuous are stored, and a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) small hit holds are stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. It may be a condition for starting a specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (begin easily). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) out of (1) and (2) described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high accuracy and low base state) occurs, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C. Is generated, and when the jackpot is a 4R jackpot (4R 1st jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot), a mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a 15R jackpot (15Rth jackpot) occurs. In the case of (3 big hits), the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of jackpot rounds that triggers the setting of state C is, for example, one type of 10 rounds, the ending period is if the gaming state when the 10R jackpot occurs is state A (left-handed game). A mode selection period may occur during the mode selection period, and if the state is B or C (right-handed game), the mode selection period may occur in a predetermined round game (for example, from the start of 9R to the middle of 10R). Of these, in the latter case, the notification that the mode selection period will start from the next round (notification before the start of the selection period) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. Further, the time when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that becomes the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and is, for example, from the start of 5R to the end of 6R. , Only the final round, etc., may occur in any round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the ending period of the jackpot, the round effect of the final round before the start of the ending period is to notify that the mode selection period will be started after that (notification before the start of the selection period). It may be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of the effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, the effect mode selection in the mode selection period may be automatically selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes by a lottery or the like on the sub control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one aspect of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulette shapes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by a roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the state C is set to two types (effect mode C and D), but it may be possible to select one effect mode from among three or more types.

In addition, the effect related to the variation display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment (variation mode, stop mode, reach effect mode, etc.), and the effect executed in association with the small hit in the state C (effect mode C, D). (Small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect (display of notice image) in effect mode D, notification screen and mode selection screen related to mode selection period, etc. The modes of the various effects are merely examples, and the modes of the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the preview image is displayed in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (preliminary image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the notice image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. .. Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display, a display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display and a drum display is provided, and the display means is used in the above-mentioned effect mode D. The notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image of the above may be configured to be feasible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 (pachinko gaming machine 1), of which the second image display device 71 is relative to the front frame 51. However, the third image display device 72 is also rotatable in the same manner, and is tilted toward the initial state (first state) and the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51) (tilted state (inside the front frame 51). The second state) may be taken. In this way, the relationship with the hall equipment (CR unit, ball lending machine, and other inter-machine equipment) adjacent to the right side of the gaming machine and the gaming machine (frame opening) should not be hindered. Is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Was provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the panel side display means as the main liquid crystal (first image display). It may be provided on the left and right sides of the device 7), or one sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be done. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) were all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 71 and the third. The image display device 72 may be used as a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in principle, the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol 8 are performed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) (FIGS. 54 to 54 to 5). 58, 67 to 73, 74 (a), 75, 76), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) is displayed on the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal) when the full rotation effect is executed. The middle symbol (directed symbol 8C) was displayed on the central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), and the right symbol (directed symbol 8R) was displayed on the right display screen 72a (right sub liquid crystal) (see the middle row of FIG. 77). .. That is, in principle, the effect symbol (stop effect symbol) that is stopped and displayed after the variable display is displayed on the first image display device 7, while in the full rotation effect, the middle symbol among the stop effect symbols is the first image. It was supposed to be displayed on the display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the left symbol and the right symbol were displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. On the other hand, even in the variation effect other than the full rotation effect, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be configured to display a part of the stop effect symbol.

For example, when the first image display device 7 starts the variable display of the effect symbol 8 and then the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) on the screen and the reach is established, the reach state is configured. The left symbol and the right symbol (a part of the stop effect symbol) are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively. In that state, after the reach effect display is performed on the first image display device 7, the middle symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed on the first image display device 7, and then the second image display device 71 is displayed until then. The left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third image display device 72 are moved to the first image display device 7 and displayed side by side on the left and right of the middle symbol, and finally three effect symbols (stop effect symbols) are displayed. Is confirmed and displayed. Further, for example, it indicates whether or not the effect symbol 8 is a probabilistic jackpot depending on the symbol type when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (scroll eyes) on the first image display device 7 (for example, with a red symbol). If there is a probabilistic jackpot, if it is a symbol other than the red symbol, a chance jackpot, etc.), if a so-called "re-lottery effect" is performed when a jackpot mode that is not a probabilistic jackpot is displayed The middle symbol is displayed on the first image display device 7 like a rotation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively, and these three symbols are displayed respectively. The re-lottery effect is performed by synchronizing with the device and scrolling the display. By providing an effect mode (variable effect pattern) such as a reach effect or a re-lottery effect, the display variation of the effect symbol 8 (stop effect symbol) that is stopped and displayed after the variable display is increased, and the variable effect is diversified. It becomes possible to.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (secondary display device) are made into a liquid crystal display device smaller than the first image display device 7 (main display device). The display screen had a substantially square shape (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the size (screen size) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (secondary display device) may be larger than those shown in the examples. Specifically, the length of the display screen of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (main display device). A vertically long rectangular image display device (liquid crystal display device) having a length substantially equal to or longer than the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the above is provided on the front side of the front frame 51 and on the left side and the right side of the viewing window 51a, respectively. You may. Also in this case, the image display device provided on the left side of the front surface of the front frame 51 shall be rotatably supported in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. By providing such a vertically long rectangular image display device as a sub-display device on the game machine frame side (front frame), it is possible to perform a dynamic effect display that gives more impact to the player. In particular, the vertical length (vertical direction) of the display screen of the sub-display device provided on the game machine frame side is changed to the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the image display device (main display device) provided on the game board side. ) Is approximately the same as or longer than the length of), and the sub-display devices are arranged so as to line up in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) of the main display device. However, it is possible to perform an effect display (wide display in the horizontal (left-right) direction) such that the sub-display devices located on the left and right sides of the sub-display device are expanded (enlarged) to one or both of them.

Specifically, for example, the first image display device 7 (main display device) is executing the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, and the mode (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect during the execution is In a specific mode, the display area of the background image (background screen) displayed on the display screen of the main display device is gradually expanded to the display screen of the image display device (secondary display device) on the frame side ( It is possible to perform effects such as expanding) or expanding (expanding) the entire display screen at once. Alternatively, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed after the variable display on the main display device, the effect symbols are enlarged and displayed, and one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left symbol and the right symbol. It is also possible to display a part or all on the display screens of the left and right sub-display devices, and display the middle symbol on the display screen of the main display device.

The display contents are displayed from the main display device (board side display device) located approximately in the center of the game board (inside the game area) to the sub display devices (frame side display device) located on the left and right sides (outside the game area). In order to obtain the effect of the effect of expanding (expanding) the (display area), the length of the display screen of the secondary display device in the vertical direction (vertical direction) should be at least the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the main display device. It is desirable that the length is 1/2 or more, and preferably 2/3 or more.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a display means for displaying variable display of identification information, and based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. There is. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variation display to the player depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed (deriving display) when the variation display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In a gaming machine provided with the display means as described above, the player pays attention to the identification information displayed on the display means to proceed with the game. However, the player becomes tired of the game as the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, and it becomes difficult to maintain the interest in the game. The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a new aspect of the display of identification information that attracts the interest of the player and to improve the interest of the game. It is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
It is a gaming machine capable of displaying the variation of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and notifying the result of the variation display according to the display mode of the identification information when the variation display is stopped.
Equipped with a variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information
The variable display means
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode.
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the stopping mode when stopping the variable display depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

According to such a gaming machine, while the variation display means performs the variation display of the identification information, when the variation display is stopped, the variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. Then, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display. Therefore, the player can infer the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) after that, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols.
As the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, at least, the first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order and the stop order of the plurality of symbols are the first stop order. It has a second stop mode, which is a second stop order different from the stop order.
As the display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least the first display mode that triggers the execution of the predetermined special game and the second display that triggers the execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game are displayed. It has a mode and a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of a special game.
The variable display means
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode.
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variation display of the identification information is performed by the variation display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. It has a first stop mode to be performed and a second stop mode to be a second stop order different from the first stop order (first stop mode), and also has identification information when the variable display is stopped. As the display mode of (plurality of symbols), at least the first display mode that triggers the execution of a predetermined special game, the second display mode that triggers the execution of another special game different from the special game, and the special game It has a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of. Then, when the display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derivated display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is displayed in the first stop order (first stop order). It is possible to stop in the first stop mode), and in the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is stopped in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. Therefore, the player can infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, there is a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game.
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, there is a third stop mode in which the stop times of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same.
The variable display means
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derivated display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (a plurality of symbols), a special game is further executed. When the fourth display mode is not a trigger and the display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) due to the stop of the variable display is the fourth display mode, the above-mentioned In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, it is possible to stop the variable display of the plurality of symbols. Therefore, the stop mode of the variable display when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed includes a mode (third stop mode) in which it is possible to immediately recognize that the special game is not feasible. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to diversify the stopping mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and not to incite the player's expectation for the execution of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
It is characterized in that a predetermined effect display is executed when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (deriving display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. If this is the case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize to the player that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the special game is executed triggered by the display in the first display mode. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 1-2 to 1-4 described above.
It is equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed.
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The second gaming state is characterized in that, as compared with the first gaming state, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently changed to the first display mode. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state as a gaming state when the variable display of the identification information is performed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently the first display mode. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the display of the first display mode is higher than that of the first display mode. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the frequency of stopping the variable display of the identification information in the first stop mode increases. As a result, in the second game state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is raised. It becomes possible to fan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above.
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, there are at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type.
The first display mode is composed of the symbol of the first symbol type and the symbol of the second symbol type among the second symbol types.
It is characterized in that at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first game state is set as the second symbol type in the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type as the types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among these first symbol types and second symbol types, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first game state is regarded as the second symbol type in the second game state. It has become a thing. Therefore, a symbol that cannot form the first display mode because it is a symbol of the first symbol type in the first game state changes to a symbol that can form the first display mode in the second game state. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, but also to the symbol type.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 1, it is possible to realize a display of a new mode that attracts the interest of the player with respect to the display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable entry port (for example, the big winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable entry port. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on the above. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit given in response to the entry of the game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit that the player will acquire (acquired profit amount) is predetermined. Is known to be displayed in the display area of (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

However, the display of the amount of profit earned as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, and the production lacks freshness. The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a new aspect of the production as a production for displaying the earned profit amount and to improve the game entertainment. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that allows the game ball to change between a state in which it cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
A profit-giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance, and
A profit production execution means capable of executing a profit production that displays the amount of profit earned when the game profit is granted by the profit giving means,
Equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means can control the gaming state to the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the control condition.
The profit effect executing means includes at least a first profit effect that additionally displays the amount of profit gained based on the ball entering the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the profit effect execution means in the specific game state in the specific period. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second profit effect in which the amount of profit earned is added and displayed based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance.

According to such a gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a variable slot while being controlled to a specific gaming state, and a predetermined gaming profit is given to the player in response to the ball entering the variable slot. As an effect (profit effect) that displays the amount of game profit (earned profit amount) to be given, at least two types of effects, the first profit effect and the second profit effect, can be executed, of which the second profit effect is possible. Is to be executed during a specific period during a specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the profit production executed based on the entry into the variable ball entrance in the specific game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect executing means can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and also can execute the first profit effect in the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on the predetermined second display unit without executing the effect.
After the end of the specific period, the effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period is added to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being feasible.

According to such a gaming machine, during a specific gaming state, during a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance, and in the specific period, the first profit effect is executed. The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the ball entering the variable ball entry port. In addition, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the acquired profit amount (the earned profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding (adding) to the earned profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the earned profit amount in the specific game state and enhance the effect of the profit production.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above.
An acquisition information storage means that can store the acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition conditions,
Identification information display means that can execute variable display of identification information based on the acquired information,
A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining whether or not the acquired information is specific acquired information before executing the variation display is provided.
Based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result, it is possible to enter the ball into the variable ball entry port.
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as the display result of the variation display.
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific gaming state. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and if the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information is displayed. As a result, the specific display result is derived, and it becomes possible to enter the ball into the variable ball entry port. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started under the condition that a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. That is, it is a period that can be started under the condition that it is confirmed that the ball can be entered into the variable ball entrance with a predetermined number of specific acquisition information as an opportunity. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit effect associated with the start of the specific period during the specific game state and enhance the effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
The specific period is characterized in that it ends after the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means can be used as an opportunity to enter the variable ball entrance at the start of the specific period. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the ball enters the variable entrance. After it becomes possible, the specific period ends. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect will be executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above.
The pre-determination means can execute the pre-determination even during the specific period.
It is characterized in that the specific period is extended based on the determination result that the specific acquisition information is newly obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

According to such a gaming machine, the pre-judgment can be executed even during the specific period, the pre-judgment is executed for the acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquisition information. If a judgment result to that effect is obtained, the specific period will be extended. As a result, the period during which the second profit effect is executed is extended, so that the effect of the profit effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-3 to 2-5 described above.
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination.
When a predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed differs depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

According to such a gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, a predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of a preliminary determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The effect mode differs depending on the number of stored specific acquisition information when the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to produce a profit effect and a predetermined effect during the specific game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 2, it is possible to realize a new aspect of the production as a production for displaying the acquired profit amount and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, there is widely known a gaming machine in which a variable display of identification information is performed and a special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. In this type of gaming machine, there is a game machine configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The production mode can be selected at various times, for example, during variable display of identification information, during display of standby screen (demo screen), during special game (for example, during big hit game). It is possible. Further, in a configuration in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game may be selected (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174956).

However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, there is a problem that the mode of occurrence of the selectable time and the mode of notification indicating the occurrence are uniform and lack freshness. there were. The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to select a production mode after a special game in a new manner and to improve the interest of the game. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that allows the game ball to change between a state in which it cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
It is provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result.
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games.
A gaming machine configured to allow a ball to enter the variable entrance port in the round game.
It has a plurality of effect modes as an effect mode when variable display of identification information is performed.
A selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period that enables the effect mode after the end of the special game to be selected from the plurality of effect modes at a predetermined time after the start of the special game.
When the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game, the first notification means for notifying the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game is provided. Is what you do.

According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. When the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the special game, the notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, after notifying in advance in the round game before that that the effect mode can be selected (the selection period will occur) in the predetermined round game during the special game, the effect mode selection period is set. It is possible to select the production mode in a new mode, such as when the occurrence (start) is reached. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the selection of the production mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect mode can be selected during the selection period by, for example, manual selection in which the player selects and inputs one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. Includes automatic selection, where either is automatically selected.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
When the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game, the second notification means for notifying the selection period in the predetermined round game, and
When the predetermined round game is completed and the next round game is started, a third notification means for notifying before the end of the selection period is provided.
The selection period is characterized in that it ends during the round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, when a selection period of the production mode occurs in a predetermined round game, a notification is given during the selection period in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game is completed. Is started, the notification is performed before the end of the selection period in the round game (the next round game after the predetermined round game). Then, the selection period ends during the round game in which the notification is performed before the end of the selection period (during the next round game of the predetermined round game). Therefore, when the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification before the start of the selection period (notification by the first notification means) performed in the round game before the predetermined round game and the predetermined notification. A special game is provided by notification during the selection period performed in the round game (notification by the second notification means) and notification before the end of the selection period performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game (notification by the third notification means). It is possible to prompt the player to select a later production mode. In this way, by adopting a new notification mode such as prompting the player to select the effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. .. Further, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-mentioned notification is performed from before the start to the end of the selection period, so that the player selects the production mode. It is possible not to miss the opportunity to select the production mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
It is equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed.
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the first game state, the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result and the special game is executed, and in the second game state, the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result. It is characterized in that the occurrence time of the selection period is different from that when the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, there are cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the first gaming state and a special game is executed, and a second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The time when the selection period of the effect mode occurs differs depending on the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed depending on the state. As a result, it is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the subsequent effect mode selectable time depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
When the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result in the first game state, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the special game are completed. Notification during the selection period will be made
When the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result in the second game state, the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the special game. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the first game state, all the round games constituting the special game are completed. Later, a selection period of the effect mode is generated, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and the special game is executed in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game during the special game is performed. In this case, the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and the second notification means are generated. 3 Notification by the notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed in the first game state, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after all the round games are completed, and the player is in the second game state. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all the round games. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of selecting the effect mode different depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, which gives the player a different impression. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above.
As the special game, there are multiple types of special games,
It is characterized in that the occurrence time of the selection period differs depending on the type of special game to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the occurrence time of the effect mode selection period differs depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable time depending on the type of the special game to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
As the plurality of types of special games, there are at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of round games is larger than that of the first special game.
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the first special game are completed, and notification during the selection period is performed.
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all the round games constituting the first special game are completed. Later, a selection period of the effect mode is generated, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large is executed, the effect mode selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the above-mentioned notification by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period). Notification) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after all the round games are completed, and the second special game is given. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the end of all round games. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of selecting the effect mode different depending on whether the first special game is executed or the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player. Become.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new manner.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, the game was aimed at the first starting port, and in the high base state, the game was aimed at the second starting port. In addition, there have been so-called right-handed pachinko machines that aim at the right side area of the game area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it cannot be said that efficient gaming can proceed. In view of the above circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined gaming area, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming efficiency. At the same time, we will provide gaming machines that enhance the interest of gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A specific starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
Specific identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the specific starting port and specific identification information
Identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the variable starting port and
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state, and
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter, and a special game execution means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with the above, and is characterized in that the specific start port, the first variable entry port, the variable start port, and the second variable entry port are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific start port, a first variable ball entry port, a variable start port, and a second variable ball entry port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are upstream of the game area. Downstream from, the specific start port, the first variable ball entry port, the variable start port, and the second variable ball entry port are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

Specifically, in order for the game to proceed smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state), and the specific start port related to this must be entered. Place it in the uppermost stream in the ball mouth. This increases the possibility that the variable starting port is first in the second state (open state). Further, by adopting a gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that has entered (passed through) the specific start port continues to flow down the game area, the subsequent game can proceed smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific starting port, it is possible to speed up the ball entry when a special game is executed and to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable entry port upstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the variable start port that is in the second state during the special game and enters the first variable entry port. It is also possible to prevent a situation in which entry is hindered.

In addition, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entry port, the variable start port in the second state can be used except when the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state in a special game. , It is possible to give priority to the flowing game ball over other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the ball does not enter the variable starting port even though the variable starting port is in the second state. Further, by arranging the second variable entrance port downstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the second variable entrance based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start opening. The frequency will change, and it will be possible to add a variety of playability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the special aspect, it has a first special aspect and a second special aspect.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game is considered to have more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special aspect and a second special aspect as modes of stop display of identification information for executing a special game, and the first special game and the first special game as special games. It has 2 special games. Then, the first special game is set as a special game in which the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is set to the ball-entry state (open state), and the second special game is set. Then, the second variable entry port is set to be in a state where the ball can enter.

Specifically, first, in order to set the variable start port to the second state (open state), the specific start port related to this is arranged at the uppermost stream among these entry ports. Next, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific start port, the ball entry when the first special game with a large amount of game profit is executed can be speeded up, and a large amount of game balls can be played in a short period of time. Allows acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entry port, the second state is variable except when the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state in a special game. It is possible to allow a flowing game ball to enter the starting port with priority over other entry ports. Further, the second variable entry port, which is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game in which the game profit amount is small, is arranged downstream of the variable start opening, and it is possible to add various game features. This makes it possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special aspect and the second special aspect, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, profits that can be obtained, and variable entry port for opening state) can be exemplified.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Equipped with a game state setting means that can be set
In the second game state, the game ball is inserted into the variable start port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the game ball is entered into the second variable entry port arranged on the downstream side of the variable start port. By making it difficult to enter the ball
The first game state is characterized in that the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is low and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first gaming state. Since the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state is in the second variable entry state rather than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the game is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3.
It is characterized in that the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second variable entrance port is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the variable starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit (for example, the prize ball given by the entry of one game ball) obtained by the entry of the game ball is second than that of the variable start port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state when the second special game occurs, the game ball that has flowed down can easily enter the second variable entry port on the downstream side. In the second gaming state, in which the variable start port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the variable start port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable ball entry port, which has more game profits that can be obtained than the variable start port, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first game state. , Enhance the game entertainment. In addition, this makes it possible to make the game profits that can be obtained different when the same second special game occurs between the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. It becomes.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same gaming state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating a game, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6.
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port is provided.
The first identification information and the identification information can be variablely displayed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variablely displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information that is variablely displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are displayed in parallel. Variable display is possible (at the same time). This makes it possible to diversify the game playability while providing smooth game progress in a simultaneous variable gaming machine (simultaneous variable machine) that can variablely display the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously). To do.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest while enabling smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), there are a plurality of gaming states as game states, and when the jackpot game is executed, the normal state is changed to the probabilistic state or the time saving state which is advantageous to the player. It has become a transitional gaming machine. Further, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbol is displayed fluctuating a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored. In such a gaming machine, a certain effect such as preventing the game from getting bored by shifting the gaming state has been exhibited.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the game playability and enhances the gaming interest by giving a feature to the transition mode of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result is provided. It ’s a game machine,
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number of times, the gaming state is changed to the first gaming state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the highly probable second gaming state to the highly probable first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As the specific result, it has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing the common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is reached a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state or a high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, this makes it possible for the player to expect that the game state changes to the second game state with a high probability when a specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the game interest. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability and the game profit that can be obtained is larger than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result.
A gaming machine equipped with a launching device that launches a gaming ball into a gaming area with a predetermined firing intensity.
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting port is provided in a second game area where a game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter.
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.
As a result of the variation display of the first identification information based on the entry into the first starting port, the first specific result is not obtained.
It is characterized by having the first specific result as a result of the variation display of the second identification information based on the entry into the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. .. Then, when the first specific result is obtained, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is reached a specific number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, the result of the variable display of the first identification information does not have the first specific result, and the result of the variable display of the second identification information has the first specific result. As a result, different game playability can be provided depending on whether the game ball is inserted into the first start port and the game ball is inserted into the second start port, and the game playability is diversified to enhance the game interest. It becomes possible to increase.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As the specific result, it has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.
It is characterized by having the second specific result as a result of the variation display of the second identification information based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second specific result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the specified number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state or a high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, this makes it possible for the player to expect that the game state changes to the first game state with a high probability when a specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the game interest. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2.
As the specific result, it has a third specific result,
When the third specific result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the first game state with a high probability, and the game state does not change until the next specific result is obtained in the game state. And
It is characterized by having the third specific result as a result of the variation display of the first identification information based on the entry into the first starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second specific result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. Then, when the third specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, the gaming state is maintained with a high probability and the first gaming state until the next specific result is obtained. It is supposed to be done. As a result, as a result of the variation display of the first identification information, there is no one that changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability based on the variation display of a specific number of times, and the special game ends. It has a high probability of guaranteeing the gaming state of the first gaming state from later until the next specific result is obtained. Further, this makes it possible to play the game with a sense of security in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability and the game profit that can be obtained is larger than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4.
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-5.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 6, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result is provided. It ’s a game machine,
As the specific result, the first specific result and the fourth specific result are included.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.
When the fourth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display becomes the second number, the gaming state is changed to the first gaming state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the first specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the first number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. Further, when the fourth specific result is that the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the second number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of changes in the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

In this embodiment, when the number of times of variation display between the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and a second. 1 It is assumed that the game state changes. As another aspect, when the number of times of variation display of the second identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variation display of the first identification information, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state with high probability. It may change from the first game state with a high probability. As another aspect, when the number of times of variation display of the first identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variation display of the second identification information, the gaming state is highly probable and the second game is played. It may change from the state to the first gaming state with high probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
As the specific result, a second specific result and a fifth specific result are provided.
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
When the fifth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing the common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second specific result is that the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display between the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the fifth specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state or a high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of changes in the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, as a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times elapses and the second number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
It is said that there is a higher probability that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a higher probability when the gaming state changes in the second number of times than when the gaming state changes in the first number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is set to be larger than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the second number of times is than when the change timing of the gaming state is the first number of times. There is a high probability that the game will change to the first gaming state. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the game state is maintained without changing, and the player reaches the second number of times with the game state remaining in the second game state. At that time, the game is played with a high probability of raising the expectation of changing to the first game state. As a result, in the second game state, there is a point that raises the expectation of a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a higher probability than when the gaming state changes in the first number of times than in the case where the gaming state changes in the first number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is set to be larger than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the first number of times is than when the change timing of the gaming state is the second number of times. There is a high probability that the game will change to the first gaming state. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the game state will change, and when the game state reaches the second number of times while the second game state remains, it is possible. Although the sex is lower than that of the first number of times, the game is played with a high probability of changing to the first game state. As a result, in the second game state, there is a point that raises the expectation of a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability and the game profit that can be obtained is larger than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 7, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result.
A first condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is determined based on the first condition, and a second condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is determined based on the second condition. A gaming machine equipped with a second identification information fluctuation time determination means that can be set.
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information to be determined is shorter than that in the first condition state.
The gaming states include the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, and the high probability and the first gaming state and the first condition. It is characterized by having a two-condition state, the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability, and a first condition state and a first condition state. (2) A second identification information fluctuation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the identification information is shorter than that of the first condition state is provided. Further, the gaming states have a predetermined probability, a first gaming state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability, a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability, a first gaming state and a second condition state, and a high probability. In addition, it has a second gaming state and a second condition state, and in the gaming state in which the first condition state is set, the variation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1.
It is more likely that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is a specific result. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, it is more likely that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the game profit, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. is there. As a result, the player expects to be set to a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed a lot, that is, a second condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is relatively short. Will play the game. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with a third starting port where game balls can enter
The second identification information is varied and displayed based on the entry of the ball into the third starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that a third starting port is provided in which the second identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information can be displayed in a variable manner by entering either the variable second starting port or the third starting port, and the game can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with a launcher that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are second games in which a game ball launched with the second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in the area
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game ball is launched into the first game area to change and display the first identification information to play the game. ,
The gaming states are the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the first. In the two-condition state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area to display the second identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , It is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the gaming states have a predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, the gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming states are a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, It is assumed that a game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is played by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is performed with the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3.
Equipped with a launcher that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the third start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are filled with a game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity. Provided in the second possible gaming area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game ball is launched into the first game area to change and display the first identification information to play the game. ,
The gaming states are the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the first. In the two-condition state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area to display the second identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second ball entry port are provided. The variable ball entry port is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the gaming states have a predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, the gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming states are a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, It is assumed that a game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is played by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is performed with the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state than in the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state in which a high probability, a first gaming state, and a second condition state have a higher probability of obtaining a game profit than a high probability, a second gaming state, and a second condition state There is. As a result, the player advances the game with the expectation that the game state is set to the first game state and the second condition state with a high probability, and enhances the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6.
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state, the game ball is inserted into the second start port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, and the ball is inserted into the second start port, and the ball is more than the second start port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entry port arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port is increased with a high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the state and the first gaming state and the second condition state are made higher than the second condition state with a higher probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state and the second condition state are higher and the second is higher. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher than that in the game state and the second condition state. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 8, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result is provided. It ’s a game machine,
The gaming states include the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state. And
The second variable ball entry port is characterized in that when the game state has the high probability and the first game state is reached, the ball entry frequency of the game ball increases.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the gaming states include a predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a predetermined probability and the second gaming state, a high probability and the first gaming state, and a high probability and the second gaming state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable ball entry port increases when the first game state is reached with a high probability. As a result, the player proceeds with the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the first game state with a high probability. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launcher that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are second game areas in which a game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the first game area to fluctuate and display the first identification information.
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area. As a result, it is a gaming machine that plays a game by varyingly displaying the second identification information.
In a gaming state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed and the game is played by launching a game ball into the second game area.
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher than the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state, and the first gaming state. Is characterized by being higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , It is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the game state has a predetermined probability and is the first game state, the game ball is launched into the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming state has a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, or a high probability and a second gaming state, a gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area and the second identification information is obtained. It is supposed that the game is played with a variable display. Further, in a gaming state in which a gaming ball is launched into a second gaming area to play a game, that is, in a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, a second The game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry port is the highest is defined as the first game state with a high probability.

As a result, when the player enters the gaming state in which the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area to play the game, the player proceeds with the game with the expectation that the gaming state is the first gaming state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2.
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 9, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a special game in which a predetermined profit can be given to a player when a variable display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, the interest of the game is improved by performing various effects to raise the expectation of the player during the variable display of the identification information. As such an effect, for example, information regarding the variable display of the identification information currently being executed, the variable display of the identification information executed after that, and the like (for example, the degree of expectation (reliability) and display that the display result becomes a specific display result). There is known an effect of displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until the result is derived (see, for example, JP-A-2002-239122).

However, the effect performed during the variable display of the identification information as described above has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the interest in games. The reference invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect capable of attracting the interest of a player as an effect performed during variable display of identification information. , To improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information,
A state control means that can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed, and
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, and
It is provided with an information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect that displays information about the game after the end of the variable display during the variable display of the identification information.
The information includes at least the first information, the second information, and the third information.
The first information indicates that the special game is executed after the end of the variation display.
The second information indicates that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the variation display.
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the present after the end of the variation display.
The information display effect executing means is characterized in that at least two of the first to third information can be displayed at the start of the information display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when an information display effect for displaying information about the game after the end of the variation display is executed during the variation display of the identification information, the variation display is started at the start of the information display effect. The first information indicating that the special game is executed after the end, the second information indicating that the current game state continues even after the end of the variation display, and the game state from the present after the end of the variation display. It is possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above.
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information, or may display the second information and the third information at the start of the information display effect. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, there are cases where the first information and the second information are displayed and cases where the second information and the third information are displayed at the start of the information display effect. Therefore, the player can presume that if the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous, and the second When the information and the third information are displayed, the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous cannot be ruled out. As a result, it is possible to obtain a directing effect that arouses the expectations and anxieties of the player.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above.
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game.
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The second special game is a special game in which a game profit that can be granted is larger than that of the first special game.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
The state control means controls the gaming state after the end of the first special game to the first gaming state, and controls the gaming state after the end of the second special game to the second gaming state. ,
The information display effect executing means can execute the information display effect in the second gaming state.
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variation display.
The second information indicates that the current second game state is continued even after the end of the variation display.
The third information is characterized in that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variation display.

According to such a gaming machine, it has at least a first special game and a second special game as a special game, and has at least a first game state and a second game state as a game state, and a second special game. The game is a special game in which the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Further, the gaming state after the end of the first special game is the first gaming state, and the gaming state after the end of the second special game is the second gaming state. Then, the information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state continues even after the end of the variation display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. Therefore, the information display effect displays information (game development) related to the game after the game in the second game state (variation display of identification information) as a reference. As a result, it is possible to improve the gaming interest in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above.
Equipped with a variation effect execution means that can execute a variation effect while displaying the variation of the identification information.
The variation effect execution means can execute the variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern.
The variation effect pattern includes at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern.
When the second special game can be executed when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display.
When the first special game can be executed when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display.
The information display effect executing means is
The first information and the second information can be displayed when the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed.
It is characterized in that the second information and the third information can be displayed when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern during the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect patterns include at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect pattern. It has a pattern and a third variable effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display, and the variation display of the identification information is displayed. When the first special game can be executed when the result becomes a specific display result, the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, during the variation display of the identification information, the information display in the variation display is performed when the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the start of the effect, and when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect on the variation display is started. It is possible to display 2 information and 3rd information. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. As a result, it is possible to match the information display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information with the variable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above.
The information display effect executing means is characterized in that it is possible to change the display mode of information by the information display effect after the start of the information display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be depending on the subsequent display mode of the information. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the interest of the player as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is common to perform various effects as the identification information fluctuates and the game progresses, such as a special game. In such a gaming machine, there is one in which an effect (reach effect, etc.) indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result is performed as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154657).

However, a configuration in which a character is produced by a reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the interest in games. The reference invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to give a feature to the execution mode of the character effect to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the character effect. There is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, and
A gaming machine equipped with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The effect executing means is
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit.
It is characterized in that there are cases where the character effect is executed according to the variable display of the identification information and cases where the character effect is executed according to the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit may be executed in association with a variable display of identification information, or may be executed in association with a special game. As a result, it is possible to have a relationship between the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 described above.
Equipped with a state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed to the specific gaming state.
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit, and the character is displayed.
The effect executing means is characterized in that it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state when the variable display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variable display of the identification information. There are cases where it is executed in association with the special game and cases where it is executed in association with a special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, the first specific display result and the second specific display result are included.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
Based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the first specific display result, the first special game can be executed.
Based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed.
The first special game is considered to have more game profits that can be granted than the second special game.
The effect executing means is
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed in accordance with the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed in association with the second special game. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game is executed in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large. When it becomes possible, the character effect is executed along with the variable display, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the second special game to be assumed becomes feasible, the character effect is executed in association with the second special game. As a result, the game interest when the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) or when the second special game is performed is performed. It becomes possible to increase.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 described above.
The first variable entrance that can change the state in which the game ball cannot enter and the state in which it can enter,
It is equipped with a second variable entry port that allows the game ball to change between a state in which it cannot enter and a state in which it can enter.
In the first special game, the game ball can be entered into the first variable entrance.
In the second special game, the game ball can be entered into the second variable entrance.
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance port associated with the second special game is higher than in a game state other than the specific game state.
The effect executing means is
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed in the specific game state, the character effect is executed in accordance with the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result in the specific game state and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed in association with the second special game. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable entrance. In the second special game, which is executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, the game ball can be entered into the second variable entrance. In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance port associated with the second special game is higher than in the game state other than the specific game state. As a result, in a situation where the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed, the second variable input accompanying the second special game is entered. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the entry of the game ball into the ball mouth and the execution of the character production, and to enhance the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a big hit game and a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 11-3 to 11-5 described above.
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is provided.
The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

According to such a game machine, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game) is a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability. Is possible, and the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the second special game will be executed, and accordingly, the possibility of executing the character effect associated with the second special game will also increase. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game when the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 described above.
The specific gaming state is characterized in that the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, there is a high probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, so that the character effect associated with the second special game can be executed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information under the situation where the probability is high. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-7 described above.
The characters displayed on the predetermined display unit include a first character and a second character.
The character effect includes a first character effect and a second character effect.
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect.
The second character effect is an effect produced by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect.
The effect executing means is
When executing the character effect with the variable display of the identification information, the first character effect is executed.
When the character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effect includes a first character effect and a second character effect, and the first character effect is based on the first effect by the first character and the second character and the first character and the second character after the first effect. The effect includes the second effect, and the second character effect is an effect that includes the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed with the special game. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the character effect in a manner suitable for the situation of the game, and it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the character effect.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 11, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the character effect by giving a feature to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference Invention 12)
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to a player based on a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. Are known. Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other display (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-240381).

In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means as described above, the player pays attention to the display contents of each display means and proceeds with the game. However, a configuration having a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the mode of display by the plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest of this type of gaming machine. The reference invention 12 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a feature of a display mode by a plurality of display means and to provide a game machine having a plurality of display means. It is to improve.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
It is a gaming machine that enables a special game that is advantageous to the player to be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
First display means and
Second display means and
A variation display starting means capable of starting variation display of identification information by the first display means based on the establishment of a predetermined variation start condition, and
It is provided with a suggestion display execution means capable of executing a suggestion display suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be a specific display result.
The suggestion display executing means is characterized in that the suggestion display can be executed at at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined variation start condition is satisfied, the variation display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and it is suggested that the display result of the variation display of the identification information may be the specific display result. Suggestion display can be performed at least one of the first display means and the second display means. As a result, in addition to the variable display of the identification information by the first display means, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion display by the first display means and the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 described above.
Equipped with a game board with a game area formed
The first display means is provided inside the game area and is provided.
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, since the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board and the second display means is provided outside the game area, a wide range of display is provided inside and outside the game area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to display a suggestion with an impact.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 described above.
The second display means includes a left display means located on the left game area side of the game area and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game area.
The suggestion display executing means is characterized in that, when the suggestion display is executed by the second display means, the suggestion display can be executed at at least one of the left display means and the right display means.

According to such a gaming machine, a first display means provided inside the game area, a left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the side of the left game area, and a game area. Suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the three display means with the right display means (second display means) provided on the side of the right gaming area on the outside of the above. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion display and enhance the interest when the suggestion display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 described above.
The suggestion display executing means is characterized in that, when the suggestion display is executed by the second display means, the suggestion display in a different mode can be executed between the left display means and the right display means.

According to such a gaming machine, since the suggestion display of different modes can be executed between the left display means and the right display means, the suggestion display executed by the left display means and the suggestion display executed by the right display means It is possible to draw the player's attention to each of them. This makes it possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-4 described above.
When the suggestion display execution means does not execute the suggestion display by the second display means, the second display means includes a predetermined display execution means capable of executing another predetermined display.

According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion display is not executed by the second display means, another predetermined display can be executed by the second display means. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-5 described above.
A specific display execution means capable of executing a specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result after the start of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
The specific display executing means is characterized in that there are a case where the specific display is executed by the first display means and a case where the specific display is executed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is the first display means. There are cases where it is executed by the first display means and cases where it is executed by the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the specific display and enhance the interest when the specific display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-6 described above.
A stop display execution means that can execute the display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information is stopped is provided.
The stop display executing means may execute the display of the stop identification information by the first display means, or may execute the display of the stop identification information by the first display means and the second display means. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the display of the stop identification information when the variable display is stopped is executed by the first display means. , It may be executed by the first display means and the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to enhance the interest when the stop identification information is displayed.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 12, it is possible to give a feature to the mode of display by a plurality of display means and to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 13)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem of Reference Invention 12 is
It is a gaming machine that enables a special game that is advantageous to the player to be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
First display means and
Second display means and
A variation display starting means capable of starting variation display of identification information by the first display means based on the establishment of a predetermined variation start condition, and
It is provided with an effect display execution means capable of executing an effect display related to the variable display of the identification information.
The effect display executing means is characterized in that there are cases where the effect display is executed by the first display means and cases where the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined variation start condition is satisfied, the variation display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and the effect display related to the variation display of the identification information is executed by the first display means. In some cases, it is executed by the first display means and the second display means. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect display by the first display means and the second display means, triggered by the start of the variable display of the identification information by the first display means.

The "effect display related to the variable display" is, for example, an effect display that changes the background when the variable display of the identification information is performed, or an effect that indicates whether or not the result of the variable display is a specific display result. It refers to various effect displays related to the variation display of identification information, such as a display and an effect display that suggests a high or low possibility that the result of the variation display will be a specific display result.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 described above.
As a mode in which the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, a first mode in which the first display means and the second display means execute from the beginning, and initially, the first aspect. It has a second aspect, which is executed by one display means and then executed by the second display means.
When the effect display execution means executes the effect display by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display based on the first aspect and the second aspect are performed by the time when the variable display of the identification information is completed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute either one of the effect display based on the aspect.

According to such a gaming machine, as a mode in which the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning. It has a first aspect of executing the above, and a second aspect of initially executing the effect display by the first display means and then executing the effect display by the second display means. Then, when the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, either the effect display based on the first aspect or the effect display based on the second aspect is completed by the end of the variable display of the identification information. Either one can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from being uniform, and to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 described above.
The effect display based on the second aspect is characterized in that the display area of the effect display executed by the first display means is gradually expanded to the second display means. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, when the effect display related to the variable display is executed based on the second aspect, that is, the effect display is initially executed by the first display means, and then by the second display means as well. When the effect display is executed, the effect display is in a mode in which the display area of the effect display in the first display means is gradually expanded to the second display means. As a result, the display area of the effect display can be gradually expanded from the first display means to the second display means, and it is possible to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 13-1 to Reference Invention 13-3 described above.
Equipped with a game board with a game area formed
The first display means is provided inside the game area and is provided.
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, since the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board and the second display means is provided outside the game area, a wide range of display is provided inside and outside the game area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with an impact.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 described above.
The second display means includes a left display means located on the left game area side of the game area and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game area.
The effect display executing means is characterized in that when the effect display is executed by the second display means, the effect display can be executed at at least one of the left display means and the right display means.

According to such a gaming machine, a first display means provided inside the game area, a left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the side of the left game area, and a game area. The effect display can be executed by any one of the three display means with the right display means (second display means) provided on the side of the right game area on the outside of. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest when the effect display is performed.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 13, it is possible to give a feature to the mode of display by a plurality of display means and to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 14)
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to a player based on a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. Are known. In this type of gaming machine, the frame (front frame) that constitutes the outer shell of the gaming machine is provided with directing means such as movable accessories (gimmicks), LEDs, speakers, and directing indicators, and these directing means are used for the progress of the game. There is a product in which the effect of the effect is enhanced by driving the slingshot (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-195934).

However, when providing the production means on the frame of the gaming machine, for example, the relationship with the island equipment (CR unit, data display, etc.) on which the gaming machine is installed, the relationship with other gaming machines installed adjacent to the gaming machine, and the front surface. It is necessary to consider the opening and closing of the frame, etc., and it is usually accompanied by restrictions due to them. For this reason, in a gaming machine in which the effect means is provided on the frame body, the installation mode of the effect means tends to be uniform, and the actual situation is that the gaming machine lacks novelty. The reference invention 14 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a feature to the installation mode of the production means and making the player feel novel. It is in.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A game board with a game area formed on the front,
A front frame having a viewing window that covers the front surface of the game board and makes the game area visible from the front is provided.
The front frame is provided so that one end side thereof is pivotally supported and can be opened and closed.
A first frame-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the one-side end side of the front surface of the front frame so as to be rotatable with the viewing window side. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, a front frame covering the front surface of the gaming board is provided so as to be able to open and close (rotatably) around the axis on the one side end side by axially supporting the one side end side thereof. .. Then, on the one side end side of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is axially supported, a first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image can rotate between the front frame and the viewing window side of the front frame. It is provided in. Because the viewing window of the front frame that makes it possible to see the game area formed on the front surface of the game board is located inside (center side) of the front frame rather than the one side end side that is the axially supported side of the front frame. By rotating the first frame side display means toward the viewing window side when the front frame is opened, the first frame side display means can be housed in the viewing window side (inside the front frame). Further, when closing the front frame, the first frame side display means is rotated in the direction opposite to that when the front frame is opened (one side end side of the front frame), thereby causing the first frame side display means. Can be restored to its original state. Therefore, even if the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on the one side end side of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported, the opening and closing of the front frame may be hindered. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode such as providing a display means (first frame side display means) on one side end side which is the side on which the front frame is pivotally supported. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a player feel a novelty that has never existed before.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 described above.
The first frame side display means is configured so that when it is in the initial state of not rotating toward the viewing window side, the display surface is in a state of being inclined toward the viewing window side while being visible from the front.
The first frame side display means is provided with a maintenance means capable of maintaining the initial state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first frame side display means is in the initial state of not rotating toward the viewing window side, the display surface is in a state of being tilted toward the viewing window side while being visible from the front. It is possible to maintain the first frame side display means in that state (initial state). Since the display surface of the first frame side display means is inclined toward the viewing window side, a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the game area through the viewing window can display the first frame side display means with a small movement of the line of sight. In a situation where the surface (display content) can be visually recognized and the front frame can be closed to play the game by keeping the first frame side display means in such a state (initial state), the first It is possible to ensure good visibility of the display surface (display content) of the frame-side display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 described above.
The maintenance means is characterized in that it is composed of an urging means that urges the first frame side display means to the one side end side.

According to such a gaming machine, a maintenance means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state urges the first frame side display means to one side end side (the side on which the front frame is pivotally supported). It is composed of urging means. Therefore, by rotating the first frame side display means toward the viewing window side, the initial state of the first frame side display means is released, and by releasing the rotation toward the viewing window side, the first frame side display means is released. , It is urged to one side end side of the front frame by the action of the urging means (maintenance means) and returns to the initial state. As a result, when the first frame side display means is not rotated toward the viewing window side, the first frame side display means can be automatically set to the initial state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-3 described above.
The front surface of the front frame is provided with a second frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image on the other end side facing the one side end side.

According to such a gaming machine, a second frame side display capable of displaying a predetermined image on the other side end side of the front surface of the front frame facing the one side end side provided with the first frame side display means. Means are provided. As a result, it becomes possible to make a gaming machine equipped with a novel frame body (front frame) in which display means are arranged on both sides of one side end side and the other side end side of the front frame.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 described above.
The second frame-side display means is characterized in that the display surface is visible from the front and is inclined toward the viewing window side.

According to such a gaming machine, the second frame side display means is configured so that the display surface can be visually recognized from the front and is inclined toward the viewing window side. As a result, the player who plays the game while visually recognizing the game area through the viewing window can visually recognize the display surface (display content) of the second frame side display means with a small movement of the line of sight, similarly to the first frame side display means. It becomes possible to do.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-5 described above.
The back side of the game board is provided with a board-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image and being visible from the front through the viewing window.

According to such a gaming machine, a board-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the back side of the game board, and the board-side display means can be visually recognized from the front through a viewing window of a front frame. It is said that. This enables various displays using the frame-side display means provided on the front surface of the front frame (outside the game area) and the board-side display means provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area). It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 14, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a feature to the installation mode of the effect means and making the player feel novel.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 7 1st image display device, 7a display screen, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display unit), 8 effect symbol, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start Mouth, 30 1st prize opening, 35 2nd prize opening, 39 specific area, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display) ), 50 Gaming machine frame, 51 Front frame, 52 Main body frame, 53 Outer frame, 56 Frame hinge, 71 Second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 Third image display device, 72a display screen, 75 Second image display Device hinge, 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control unit), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that enables a special game that is advantageous to the player to be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
A game board with a game area formed on the front,
A front frame having a viewing window that covers the front surface of the game board and makes the game area visible from the front.
A first display device provided on the back side of the game board and capable of viewing the display screen through the viewing window .
A second display device provided on the left side of the front frame and capable of viewing the display screen from the front ,
A third display device provided on the right side of the front frame and capable of viewing the display screen from the front,
A variation display starting means capable of starting variation display of identification information by the first display device based on the establishment of a predetermined variation start condition, and
It is provided with an effect display execution means capable of executing an effect display related to the variable display of the identification information.
The second display device and the third display device are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction of the first display device in a state where the display screen is tilted toward the viewing window.
The effect display executing means may execute the effect display on the first display device , or may execute the effect display on the first display device, the second display device, and the third display device .
The first display device, as effect is produced when run the effect display in the second display device and the third display device, initially the second display device and the subsequently performed in the first display device It has a specific effect mode that is also executed by the third display device.
The presentation in the display based on the specific representation embodiment, the second display device and the third display effect display said first display device in which a predetermined background on each of the display screen is associated with the variable display in a state of being displayed the device After being started on the display screen of, the effect display related to the variation display is started on each display screen of the second display device and the third display device, and the display area of the background on each display screen is started. Is gradually reduced, and along with this, the display area of the effect display related to the variable display on each display screen is gradually expanded.

Images